Home

BackOffice

1. 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 208 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 3 3 8 Backup General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email Auto Backup path 1 C AMSSQL Backup r Backup path 2 is Backup Path 1 and 2 These two lines display the currently set database backup paths el Use this button to select a new backup location for the selected line Auto Ticking this option will cause BackOffice to automatically backup to the selected path cn cicetne i cuci 7 2 If you wish to change a backup location click the button to the right of each location Doing so will bring up Select a folder the following prompt Fi My Documents E My Computer HA 344 Floppy Ar a System C ME ATI H E Documents and Settings H E Intel EE MSSQL 7 Browse to and select the folder you wish to backup to i Faim 43 and then click the OK button i Go 3 RECYCLER E Cem nh ime eee gt The recommended location for your database backup is C MSSQL7 Backup however you may select any one or two backup locations you prefer Removing a backup Path To remove a backup path and clear the line click in the backup path line Hovering your mouse pointer over the line will display a pop up with more information as seen below Backup path 2 C MSSQL7 ii Click to dear path Clicking in the line will present you with the following
2. By these options there are a range of different periods that can be set for example if you wish to run a monthly report such as the Gross Profit report you may set the batch to run on the last day of every month along with the following options Start Date First day of the Current Month End Date Last day of the Current Month F When a report is set to First Last day of the lt any gt Week the weekday name will be shown as well for gt clarification 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 96 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 10 5 3 Running Schedules Manually Although enabled report schedules will run automatically based on the recurring schedule settings itis also gt possible to force a schedule to run now without affecting it s recurring schedule This feature can be useful for testing a newly created schedule to make sure itis set up correctly or simply to re run a schedule that has already run Any schedule can be run immediately by right clicking the schedule name and selecting the Run Now context menu option By doing so the Report Scheduler runs the selected schedule as per the schedule settings either in relation to the current date or a date of your choice F f LE _ as i Fm hae apm 1 Batch Schedules El Weekly Monitor ai Employee Cashup gil Activity Report by Activity Code gly Product Sales by Cashier fall Late Delivery Summary by Date Edit Schedule yii Time and
3. Vat Exclusive R 0 29 Vat Exempt Last Payed Supplier Municipality Order Quantity fi ta 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 162 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Field Viewvs Spreadsheet View Use this option to switch between the two available display modes for the available expense payment items ltem Description Expense Code Category Yat Inclusive I Active Description Subcategory Wat Exclusive I Wat Exempt Last Payed Supplier Order Quantity t Field View Expense Code Descripion Category 5ubCategoy Active vat Ex vatEcl __ vatinci Order Qu Hoi LULE Spreadsheet View Expense Code Displays the unique ID code for the selected expense item Description Displays the name for the selected expense item Last Paid spelling error Shows the date that the selected item was last paid for Category Displays the category for the selected item Click on the A button next to Category to bring up a list of currently available categories For more information see the section on Expense Categorieshe Subcategory Displays the subcategory for the selected item This is an optional item used for making more specific selections when capturing expense payments You may leave this field blank if you wish Supplier Displays the supplier of the service for the selected expense Vat Inclusive Enter the cost of one unit of measure for this expense item Vat Exclusive Dis
4. 1 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Table of Contents 3 t ms Per Sales LOCatlON cirri a a ve caudacseaseevemmensuamensecsedes 144 Giok Sapien anA aai E eaa aa i a eea e Aa AEU Ene A E anaE E DEE Enie 146 Categories Suera e E a i a aa aae 147 tems wesc ecg elec AE E ENEE EEE 148 Locations aone Aa e AEA sea nent cb E E aE Ea EE AE 157 tems per EO CAUION siesiecccetaes acheter coat de a a a e a a a a oe 159 EXPENSES ttttssssssrsssstrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneeeneennnnnnnnnnnn 161 EXPENSE Hems sccesvssseceecioosepansccscencessanccancsteacaccseeadanessenerseeeccesassceesosaacsanacceetaemasnacccausavacenceececeeecnanaetasanavssecctesmeaareees 161 Categories Sonner rE E E r A EE aae EE E Ee 163 Delivery Areas 11ttteeeeeeeeeeeeenee essen eeeeeeecnnneeeeeeeeeeeeeccneeeeeeeeeeaseecceeeeeeeeeseseescnaeeeseeeesasesscneeeeeeeeeaneenas 164 Streets isinira kaa e at pasted acts ae eds enantio a aa O a eee 165 See NiMS Oa aa a cee kis cece AE E a Ei 166 S b rbs anisina aa EP E a aaa aa A a aa OE aAa aaa OEA AA a OAA EAA 167 Over ring Codes rsssrrrrrnnsrrrnnnnnsernnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnneennnnnneennnnnnne enna 168 Discount Cle Goan cae ete wc a alo ea a e cei venice ean eae ae 170 PAULO VAD DIY DISCOUNTS cirri a eaaa e E a A a e E EEEa a aaa aE E 173 Time Based DISCOUNTS irssi sac sieeaseaaacs is oiadeaenciacen eciactae
5. 124 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Removing Items from a Recipe If you need to remove an item from the recipe select the item from the recipe on the left and press the button This will show the following prompt Clearing the Entire Recipe gt gt To clear the recipe block and start again use the gt button This will bring up the following prompt This will delete all items from the current recipe o Are you sure you want to do this Recipes and Inactive Stock Items In certain circumstances especially where menus are downloaded from a central head office you may find a stock item that was previously used is no longer needed Once a stock item has been purchased discarded or used in a stock or menu item recipe it cannot be removed completely from the Aura system In a situation such as this the stock item will be set to inactive instead By this method the item details are still stored for reporting purposes but the item cannot be used as itis inactive Where a menu item recipe contains a stock item that is then made inactive you will see the following information Recipe for above item _ Recipe Contains Inactive Items Code Oty Measure Description Cost Notice how the affected stock item itself is highlighted with a grey background Ideally this stock item should be removed and replaced with the correct item W No menu item recipes should ever have inactive items and certain measur
6. Correct Version of Street The left hand list gives you an option to select the correct street to be kept Incorrect Version s to be Replaced The right hand list gives you an option to select the incorrect streets to be moved This application should only be used if you have street names that cannot be removed from the List of Streets For more information see the section on the Street List 165 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 81 Identifying and Selecting Correct and Incorrect Streets To begin first look for the correct street name in the left hand list of streets In the following example we have Blacken Lee Glen Vista and Blacken Lee a Street Mover ver 1 0 0 6 Corect version of street lncorect versions to be replaced BLACKEN LEE GLEN VISTA _ BLACKEM LEE BLACKEN LEE GLEN ISTA BLACKEN LEE Letus assume that Blacken Lee Glen Vista is the correct street name whereas Blacken Lee is the incorrect street name but both have customers assigned to them This means the incorrect street cannot be simply removed from the street list In order to fix this first select the correct street on the left hand side a Street Mover ver 1 0 0 6 Corect version of street lncorect versions to be replaced BEHUSH BUCK MEYER SDAL BLACKEN LEE BLACKEN LEE i Notice how the street name that you select on the left as the correct street automatically d
7. Displays the menu category for the selected menu item The menu category contains certain information regarding the menu items assigned to them as well as grouping the menu items inside a new sale in nvoicing E To the right of the category drop down list you will see a button to open a full list of the menu categories The only benefit of using this over the normal drop down listis that you can see the sort order of your categories more easily Inv Description This line will determine the description of the item as it displays inside nvoicing the menu item related reports and on the customer s till slip Slip Description This line will determine the description of the item as it will print out on the production slip Size The size option works as a Sub category inside the currently selected main category Sort Order Using this option you may select the order in which the menu items will be displayed inside the category on Invoicing The above two options are optional and may be left out The Size option is recommended for certain categories For example in the Drinks category assigning sizes to your Cans 500ml or 2I Bottles would make it easier to navigate the menu inside nvoicing Take note these will both only make a difference in Touch Screen Mode and will have no bearing on the Keyboard Mode HO Code This is a head office reference code for the current item It will not affect your Aura system ata store level R
8. Large Feta Cheese Extra Petite es ee dl mm am ee er mm m aa Standard Alternatively if you had selected No for this first prompt this would assume that you want to proceed with making the item inactive The following prompt will then be displayed Vat Exempt This options marks the selected stock item as exempt from value added tax Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 153 Adding New Stock Items In order to add a new stock item click on the button from the top navigation bar doing so will clear all fields in the Item Description section allowing you to insert the information for the new stock item as seen below Refresh Costs Category Filter ALL Shom Active Navigation H aa H p Z Field View aie 7 tem Description Stock Code Description Wastage Categor Unit of measure Bulk Cost Stock type Controllable Prepped Cost Desired level 7 Manufacture W Inactive i Exclude from Worksheets iz Aata karnutacture fh Wat Exempt F Sub Menu After adding all required information in the fields above you will need to click on the Z button to save the item If this item is to be marked as a Manufactured Item keep in mind the stock item must be saved before a recipe can be added for this item This is done to ensure the recipe and stock item are linked correctly See the list of topics further below for more information on extra
9. POSTCARDS 2L CREME S004 COKE CREME SODA DIET SPRITE zL FANT A Selecting a category here will filter the list by items found in the selected category For the following examples the Beer category will be selected To the left of the filter drop down list is a Search feature this allows you to search through long lists of menu items to find specific items with certain keywords This search feature is a partial match anywhere search this means that if any part of any word in the item s description matches it will be shown See the example below All Menu bens Search Filter ICE CREAMS IMPULSE CARAMEL KING CONE HEAVEN STRAWBERRY HEAVEN CHOC NUT FUDGE HEAVEN BROWNIE To clear the search filter simply backspace or delete the keywords typed in the search block Enabling and Disabling Optional Items Once you understand how to manipulate the optional items list and find the items you need these must be enabled set as Optional In Use in order for Aura Invoicing to display the item in the menu Two methods can be used to select multiple items at once as described below All Menu Items All Menu Items Search Filter ICE CREAMS Search Filter ICE CREAMS IMPULSE CARAMEL KING CONE IMPULSE CARAMEL KING CONE HEAVEN STRAWBERRY O HEAVEN STRAWBERRY HEAVEN CHOC NUT FUDGE HEAVEN CHOC NHT FUDGE HEAVEN BROWNIE HEAVEN BROW Ctrl click Shift click While holding Ctrl
10. on top of your business BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 2012 Coherent Software Solutions BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Table of Contents Part I Part Il Part Ill 1 2 Part IV 1 2 Part V 1 O O ON OO OO BP OO ma 11 Part VI O oo Aa Q Welcome to Aura BackOffice 9 Software Changes 7 Getting Started With BackOffice 22 Navigating Tools seeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeccnneeeeeeeeseseeccaeeeeeeeesaeeescnaeeeeeeeesassescaeeeeeeeeeessessonaeeeeeeees 24 OUicle Start Checklistor testi seme etait nren aaea a Nana ENE NaRa E aani 30 General Notes 32 Improved Error Dialog rrs1ss rrsrsrrrrnnnnsrtnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnneeennnnnneennnnnnneennnnn ne 33 Possible Startup Messages rt strrrrrer1srrtrnnnnnnnrrrtnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnneeeennn nn 34 Activities 36 Sock An ae oes swe eaten ciea eet eee ecireye ween outs suas cta cee eweeartardee seen 37 COUMESIOCK nissan a a a eevatudetacceane cue a a a a ENE 38 PUFCHASE SIOCK amiina Ea 41 PETUR SIOCK canna E E E A E 46 ManulactUre StOCK arana a cme radansansunansestanweveccutenass 47 Discard Stock afna a a a EA A E EAN 51 Transler Stok ccecccecegscxensspzcnscacenzinccaicasevaauoasust os a Eaa Ea 53 Cashup ssseeertssssrssnsnssesseeetnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennneeennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnee eneee ennn 55 Employee C s hup amikre eea a a a aE E a
11. 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Access Level Manager n a Admin Waiter Cashier Admin Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Cashier Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Wa Wa Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Cashier Manager Manager Manager Waiter Cashier n a n a Manager Manager Manager Admin Admin Admin Manager Admin Preferences 217 Description Used to modify till shift entries in the Cashup screen Cashiers will need this if they are to cashup their own tillshifts This access permission is no longer in use Used to access the Discount Codes screen Used to open a saved table delivery or collect order for editing Used to modify the recipes displayed in the Menu Items screen Used to access the Monitoring gt Activity screen Used to access the Monitoring gt Daily Sales screen Used to access the Monitoring gt Staff Attendance screen Used to access the Monitoring gt Staff Performance screen Used to access the Monitoring gt Staff Statistics screen Used to open the cash drawer Used to overring any order Used to bypass the time warning if no orders have been processed for 24 hours Used to pay part of a GRV from an active till shift Used to backup the database Used to start a new stock take in the Count Stock screen This access permission is no longer in use This access permission is no longer in use Used to pickup a tab
12. Discard Stock 51 Transfer Stock 52 Stock Item Selector The majority of stock related screens require you to use a Stock Item Selector to specify the stock item s you need to work with Below is a description of the operation of this window Stock Item Selector Search Bese O 000000000 O O Stok OOOO O J0ML SAUCE CONTAINER FOML SAUCE CONTAINER WITH LID ABI iL ABI 2L ABI BUDDY ABI CANS ACCOUNTING FEES ACUTEMP LABELS ADVERTISING GENERAL AQUA MONTE SPARKLING AQUA MONTE STILL AURA AMO OK Cancel stock category ALL w DP SC30 DP SC70 DD0021 D0009 DDABIB DDABIC DMLACC DP ACUL DAD GEN DDG DD005 DMLAURA DV_AVO Search Enter any part of the stock item name you wish to search for the stock item list will automatically update and begin to filter the items as you type Stock Category If the stock item you are searching for has the same ora similar name to an item in a separate category you can narrow the search criteria by the category filter displaying ONLY the category you select Description and StockNO These two columns display a list of the stock items matching your search criteria Search and Stock Category you may scroll up or down through this list and click on the item you wish to work with Once the item is selected click the OK button to enter the selected item in the screen you are currently working in to continue 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version
13. Special Orders feature disabled the list of discounts was not showing up in Invoicing Improvement To improve accuracy when calculating values invoice discounts are now calculated on a line item detail level as well Invoicing will now check for menu item changes on the server at regular intervals and refresh the changes automatically New The store address as setin the Aura system settings will now print to the customer s invoice slip lf an individual trading name is setin the system settings this will also print on the customer s invoice slip along with the franchise and branch names Invoicing will now automatically check with the server database at set intervals and refresh any menu item changes as they occur Plugins and Other Aura Applications 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 20 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Fixed The automatic licensing plug in was causing Invoicing to show the invoice date warning Your clock has been turned back cashup disabled New The Order Wizard calculations will now take current GRVs into account when generating orders to meet the desired stock levels Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Getting Started With BackOffice 22 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 3 Getting Started With BackOffice BackOffice the administration module of the Aura POS suite is only required on the central server computer in each store Amongst other procedures this
14. desired stock item by typing the description in the Search block As you type the list will update and select the first item matching what you type as seen below Stock teme available for recipes Search E TRI Filter aLL hai MI STFFE RAND STAFF FOOD A 0 00 OPERATING E STA GEN RAND STATIONARY G R 20 75 STATIONARY CL 5TER RAND STERILISER LIQ FA 0 00 CLEANING C100 SACHET STERILISER S8 A 0 59 CLEANING POV EACH STRAWS WRAP RA 0 03 PACKAGING vood L SUB SPREAD A 25 13 GROCERY GOIL L SUNFLOWER OIL A 0 00 GROCERY GO36 L SWEET amp SOUR A13 11 SAUCES B CHILZ L SWEET CHILLI R14 91 SAUCES m afu gt Once the desired stock item has been located you can add it to the recipe by pressing Enter on your keyboard double clicking on the stock item or pressing the E button Doing so will present the following window Add ingredient to recipe Enter the quantity for the following item Desciption STRAWS WRAPPED Measure EACH Curent he 0 Cancel Take note of the Measure and enter the quantity required for this recipe Press Enter on your keyboard or click on OK when done You should now have the stock item in the recipe for the selected menu item If the stock item already exists in the item recipe you are trying to create or edit you will be shown the following WV message Information i The stock item STRAWS WRAPPED already exists in COKE 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9
15. reporting cosoftdbn co za W The details entered here must be for a valid and working email account please check with your email service provider for details of the SMTP address and port number Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 85 5 10 5 1 Creating a New Report Schedule When creating a new report schedule it is important to put together a brief plan of your report schedule before hand this will help to prevent reports being run unnecessarily Certain reports are not a viable option for a weekly basis while others are overwhelming on a monthly basis To give you an idea of basic weekly and monthly schedules below are a few recommended reports for each of the two examples e Weekly Report Schedule o Sales by Hour Reports Item Sales Reports o Late Delivery where the store type is applicable o Employee Time and Attendance e Monthly Report Schedule o Gross Profit o Royalty Report o Monthly Financial Analysis QO Over and above the weekly or monthly schedules described here you may also set reports to be run for longer periods than a month this is helpful with reports such as the Sales Month on Month or Key Performance Indicator where the report allows for easy comparisons between different months 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 86 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Creating Report Batch for Schedule To create a new schedule ensure that the Batch Schedules option is s
16. you may use 001 for each password prompt After this password prompt you may possibly see a series of messages pop up on screen these messages are normal and they will go away after the respective activities are performed in the Aura system Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Getting Started With BackOffice 23 The main screen in BackOffice consists of a menu across the top a toolbar down the left hand side and the main screen area for the various BackOffice components to the right as seen below F BackOffice Logo Ioj x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help AURA KP 2 on top of your business 7 A s Manufacture Stock Menu Download Meru Activat SHE Please call 086 100 AURA to report any issues Monitoring www cosoft co za Retail License License Renewal Date 18 October 2013 Menu 374 StorelD 4 ae BackOffice components have been grouped by type for example all activity type functions for example Performing a Stock Count Capturing Purchased Stock or doing a Performing a Cashup are available on the Activities toolbar and menu List information for example Discount Codes Menu Items Stock Items etc can be found under the Lists toolbar and menu At the bottom of this BackOffice home screen you will see a link labelled Visit The Aura Website clicking on this link will open your Internet Explorer and automatically take the browser to
17. 15 The Stock Factory The above window will display a list of all available purchase orders that have not been entered into the Purchase Stock screen yet select the desired order from the list and press OK If you wish to create a new order and not the automatically generated orders click on Cancel to return to the normal Create a New GRV window The orders generated in Order Manager are used to prepare a purchase these should only be entered into the Purchase Stock screen once the order has been placed and the stock arrives Adding Stock Items to the Purchase Order Once you have successfully added a new supplier purchase the GRV section should show up similar to the following keps GRY Colour Indicators GAY Date 23 October 2010 gt eV ti Ses ee Re eee en MB Unbalanced GRY Grv t Supplier Telephone Supplier Ref Purch Price VAT _ Grv Saved From Till A You should also see the Status Bar below the Stock Purchases section change Stock Purchases Entered So Far R 0 00 Amount Needed R 100 00 GAY STATUS UNDER BY R 100 00 oa The Purch Price column is the amount including VAT and the VAT column is the VAT amount on it s own The X status bar along the bottom ofthis screen now displays the amount including VAT In order to account for VAT exempt items correctly the Value Added Taxis calculated on each item individually button on the toolbar in the Stock You are now ready to add new stock items to the purchase o
18. 24 Prost 7 Use this button to save the currently active stock take MewE dit __New Edit Use this button to start a new stock take or edit a previously entered stock take Stock Take Details Stock Take Date Displays the date of the currently active stock take Stock Take Type Displays whether or not the currently active stock take is a complete or controllable stock take This is described in more detail further below Total Value of SOH Displays the total monetary value of all stock accounted for in the currently active stock take Location Displays whether the stock take is for your default location or for an alternative location For more information see the section on Stock Locations 15 Sort Order Change the sort order of the stock items in the currently active stock take The same three sort options are available when printing out the Stock Take Worksheet For more information see the section on the Stock Take Worksheet Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 39 Item Details Last Purchase Date Displays the date that the selected stock item was purchased T If you find there is an unreasonable value for one of your stock items in the stock take you may use the E button to the right of the Last Purchase Date to go directly to that purchase order Last Purchase Price Displays the cost of the last purchase for the selected stock item For more information see the section on
19. 3 Program Settings The Program Settings tab contains various settings relating to the running of your store These range from display modes to options available in Invoicing Store Settings Head Office Settings Program Settings Network Settings General invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email For more information see the relative section below e Generalkod e Invoicing 203 e Reports 204 e Cashup 203 e Imagingkoa Stockko e Searchkon e Backup 203 e PoleDisplay 203 e Picklists 203 e Updates 209 e Emaill21 j 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 202 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 3 3 1 General General invoicing Reparts Cashup Imaging stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email Program Preferences Note for all invoices Deliv Driver Message Driver 1 is on his 2 delivery 1 Driver Name So2 Num Of Deliveries Min Value for Alt Image fo Round to fo l Customer Notes Use Alternate Slip Header Prompt for Cashier password for Over Rings Auto Restart Transaction l Enable Seperate Invoicing Password Cannot print collect order on pay Save Credit Card Info Only primary operator can open the till l Enable Editing of Invoices Use Eat In Take away Report Preferences Franchise Frint Device Global Print Options Print extended kitchen slip Note for all invoices T
20. 6 3 9 38 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 1 1 Count Stock The Count Stock option allows you to enter a complete or controllable stock take for a specific date The correct capture of stock is essential for stock tracking these stock takes are used in the calculation of variations in stock levels over use versus under use and other features unique to the Aura POS System W Before entering the stock take please print out the Stock Take Worksheet report with which to count the physical stock a BackOffice Stock Take oes Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Stock take Hoe po E Post New E dit Ctrl H New stocktake Ctrl P Post stocktake Count Stock Current Stock Take Details Selected Stock Item Details Stack Take Details ltem Details A Stocktake Date Today ast Purchase Date 3 Stocktake Type Unknown i t Purchase Price Purchase Total Value of SUH Unknown Location Teale anata stock Sort Order Ti Last Manuf Date 2 Category Description Ctrl 1 Last Manuf Cost E ai j Waste 2 Petum Stock Description Only Ctrl 2 C Categor Code Ctr 3 Prepped Unit Cost Manufacture Stock Take Area Stack Discard Stock Transter Stock Weg a Cashup Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Retail License License Renewal Date 01 April 2011 Stock Take Toolbar This toolbar is described in more detail in the section on Navigating Records
21. After converting the Stock Variance report to the new system the system was adding one day to the date range When spanning a period of over one full year the KPI report was showing up blank Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Software Changes 19 The Gross Profit report was not taking VAT on delivery charges into account correctly in the header information The Royalty report variations were ignoring the setting to Exclude Delivery Changes The internal report function to compare one year s data to another was not changing the year correctly Certain reports were being generated in slip printer format when run in an automatic schedule Internal stored procedures used by the KPI report have been updated to fix potential reporting errors The stock purchase reports have been updated to prevent discrepancies between different variations of the reports The Report Scheduler was not releasing the process used to prompt a manual run of a report schedule Improved The reports menu has been updated and reordered to group relevant reports together The KPI report has been rewritten for the new reporting system The foodcost calculation descriptions on the Gross Profit report has been revised to ensure the data displayed is labelled correctly The Stock Variance report has been revised to show inactive items that had usage during the reported period in addition to the currently active items Various imp
22. By Bange q A 1 Searched 5 eee Alphabetic Logical View Summary New Search Ifa dataset filter has been set on viewing this screen again you will notice the field list only shows the selected field for the filter Below the field list two tabs are available to switch between all fields and searched fields To clear the dataset filter from here click the Clear button as seen near the mouse pointer and click the OK button If there is no specific filter set when clicking the OK button as the screen will be when first opened and after clicking Clear then a general filter will be applied displaying all the items 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 30 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 3 2 Quick Start Checklist The following list is designed to give a structured and systematic approach to getting your store up and running in the Aura POS software suite These steps are only outlined briefly here for more detailed information you will need to check the appropriate page reference mentioned in each section step Employee Setup The majority of activities in the Aura system are password protected For security reasons and for future flexibility each employee must have their own unique password with which to access the system e Employees ho e Access Permissions 21A Discount and Over ring Codes Avery important area to check is the list of available discounts and over ring codes Depending on
23. Cards F2 R 0 00 Cheques F3 A O00 Cash On Hand F4 A 0 00 Debtors F5 A O00 Petty Cash FE R 0 00 GRY s Paid R 0 00 Employee Wages Fr A 0 00 Add Addit Banking Fe A 0 00 Driver Floats FS A O 00 Float lssues F11 A 0 00 Till Float F10 A 500 00 Gratuities A 0 00 R 7 170 50 Coupons F1 Used to enter an amount for a customer coupon l e Asale where the customer paid with a store coupon this accounts for the sales amount without needing to add to the Cash On Hand Credit Cards F2 This will list the credit card sales paid into this till shift you can view or edit the amounts from this option Cheques F3 This will list the cheque sales paid into this till shift you can view or edit the amounts from this option Cash On Hand F4 The cashier should use this option to enter the cash amounts of each denomination into their own till shift T If the Till Float F10 is shown in the till shift cashup summary then the Cash On Hand F4 amount must include the float Debtors F5 If any customers have a prior arrangement with management for a tab or account of any sorts and are planning to pay the outstanding amount at a later stage these sales should be marked in this section Along with the customer name and information Petty Cash F6 Petty cash entries are small amounts paid from the till for store related miscellaneous purchases Q This feature can be disabled if need be For more information
24. D009 A DI DI lmims OMTT C nm Gim Follow the same procedure for selecting a supplier and adding stock items as found on the Purchase Stock screen For more information see the section on Purchase Stock 4 P Under special circumstances certain suppliers do allow stock to be returned when they were not the original Supplier In order to return stock to a supplier who did not originally supply it you must be granted the To Return Any Stock To Any Supplier access permission For more information on this see the section on Access Permissions 21A Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 47 5 1 4 Manufacture Stock The Manufacture Stock screen provides an interface to accurately track stock items that are used in the manufacture of other items The term manufacture is widely used as a term to describe the preparation of a particular stock item Any stock items that are used in your store are prepared in some way or other whether by the kitchen staff in store or by the suppliers before delivery If an item is prepared in store by the kitchen staff then it is generally considered a Manufactured Stock Item Amanufactured item may be anything from a simple salad dressing mixed in store to pizza or bread dough Either way the manufactured item itself will require a recipe list so that Aura knows the quantities and items that are required for the items to be manufactured For more information see the section on Sto
25. External Used to access the Manufacture Stock screen Used to flag an order as a Late Delivery Take note that this requires a discount to be set up as a late delivery Used to specify the clock in and clock out times of any employee Take note that this will affect hourly wages Used to capture or modify surveys in the Cashup screen 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Access Permission To Modify Cashup Entries To Modify Customer Pricing Level To Modify Discount Entries To Modify Invoices To Modify Menu Item Recipes To Monitor Activity To Monitor Daily Sales To Monitor Staff Attendence To Monitor Staff Performance To Monitor Staff Statistics To Open The Till To Over Ring An Invoice To Override Time Warning To Partially Pay From Till To Perform A Backup To Perform A Stock Take To Perform A Till Cashup To Perform The Daily Cashup To Pickup All Tables To Post a Till Cashup To Post Shop Cashup To Print Old Invoices To Print Stock Manufacture Slip To Process a Credit Card Transaction To Process a Food Refund To Process A Staff Meal Discount To Process Grvs To Process Invoices To Re Post A Previously Posted Cashup To Re Post A Previously Posted Shop Cashup To Re Print An Invoice To Reprint A Credit Card Slip To Reprint A Stock Manufacture Slip To Restore System Settings To Restrict Employee Categories To Return Any Stock To Any Supplier To Run Backoffice To Run Data Extractor
26. Ifno physical printer is installed a virtual printer can be used instead However this is not recommended and should only be used as a last case scenario e Because the Report Scheduler runs as a Windows service the list of printers ithas access to is stored and managed through the administrative account on your server computer This does not include a user account with administrative privileges this refers to the Administrator account directly Report Scheduler Interface When running the report scheduler you will first be prompted with a password prompt as seen in the example below Controlled Access A password i needed To Run Report Batch Scheduler F Report Scheduler Kc i Close Path Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 83 Basic layout of the application window Application Toolbar This bar contains three components e Close button This button will close the report scheduler e Save button This will save any changes made to the schedules and restart the scheduler service e Settings button This can be used to specify the email account from which emailed report batches will be sent e Service status The scheduler application is only used to configure schedules the schedules are then run by a background service T In Windows Services can have
27. In the following example we will use the Size field When selected the line will be highlighted in blue as seen here Fields Inv Descr Label Descr Prina Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Getting Started With BackOffice 29 With the Field selected that you wish to search in enter the value you wish to search for in the Field Value block as seen here Sze Field Value MED if Clear Search Type C Exact Match Partial Match at Beginning Partial Match Anywhere Case Sensitive By Value In the above example We will filter the dataset by any items that begin with MED in the SIZE field irrespective of upper or lower case Please see the Search Type description further above for more information Once all required information is entered click on the OK button to apply the filter Once the filter has been applied you may navigate through the results as you would normally keeping in mind that only items matching your custom filter settings will be displayed Once you are done with the filter you may either open the Dataset Filter options again and set a new filter repeating the steps above or you may clear the filter The filter is cleared by clicking the Clear button next to the Field Value as seen here Fields Size Field Value MED Search Type Exact Match f Partial Match at Beginning Partial Match Anywhere Case Sensitive By alue
28. Microsoft XPS Document Writer Print To Bullzip PDF Printer Auto RICOH Aficio MP C2050 RPCS Colour on SV HLT AR Print To Select your desired printer from the drop down list this will only show printers that have drivers currently installed on the local computer Email Seen here is an example of the email settings Reports Schedule Printer Settings PDF Settings Email Please note that if you want to send to multiple email addresses please type the addresses in seperated by a semi colon Example info cosoft co za reports cosoft co za To FE Subject Body To Enter the email address the reports in this batch must be sent to When entering the email address you may set the report batch to be sent to multiple email addresses this is done by separating multiple email addresses with a semi colon For example first_email gmail com second_email hotmail com third_email yahoo com Subject Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 93 Enter a subject line for the email containing this report batch itis recommended to use the report schedule s name set up on the first dialog Body If you would like to have a short description in the body you may enter it here If you are setting up a schedule to send monthly reports to your head office it would be highly advisable to mention the originating store for the reports in the body and contact details in case
29. ONO Up INE IO OWING Prompt This will delete all items fom the current recipe Are you sure you want to do this Recipes and Inactive Stock Items In certain circumstances especially where menus are downloaded from a central head office you may find a stock item that was previously used is no longer needed Once a stock item has been purchased discarded or used in a stock or menu item recipe it cannot be removed completely from the Aura system In a situation such as this the stock item will be set to inactive instead By this method the item details are still stored for reporting purposes but the item cannot be used as itis inactive Where a manufactured stock item master recipe contains an inactive stock item you will see the following warning message Recipe for above item Recipe Contains Inactive tems Description Cost al Notice how the affected stock item itself is highlighted with a grey background Ideally this stock item should be removed and replaced with the correct item 6 7 2 2 Ordering The Ordering tab is used to set required order size used by the Aura Order Manager Unit of Measure l Displays the selected unit of measure for Unit of measure EACH the selected stock item Pack Size la Pack Size This figure is the order quantity increment Pack Description for orders generated by Order Manager Head Office Code Sa Head Office Code This code is used to identify items at your head
30. Permissions Employee Records 103 Employees Add New 104 Employees Edit Records 108 Employees Menu Overview 101 Enable Editing of Invoices Mainly Table Orders Expense ltem Categories 163 Expense Items 161 Expense Menu Overview 161 210 212 202 E pe Find Previous Invoices 99 Fingerprint Access 196 Fingerprints Add Employee Login 104 Fingerprints Edit Employee Login 108 Float Setup 188 Floor Plan Designer 72 Force Password Change 202 Form Look Touchscreen Normal 188 in General Report Settings 204 General Settings 202 Get Menus 64 Getting Started 22 Goods Received Voucher GRV 41 Gratuity Line 190 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Grid Size Modifier 188 Group Items on Invoice 190 H Head Office Settings 200 Helo Menu Overvew 225 Imaging Settings 206 Internet Connection Address Dial up Only 225 Invoice Notes All Slips and Delivery Only 202 Invoice Printers Setup 193 Invoice Settings 188 Invoicing Settings 203 Items per Location 159 K Keep List Open 195 Kitchen Printer Wizard 140 Kitchen Printers Setup 193 7 oe Label Printer Setup 190 Large Order Scroller Order Navigator 195 List Old Invoices 99 Lists Menu Overview 99 Locate Specific Record 24 Locations Stock Items 157 Make Line Printers Setup 193 Manufacture Stock 47 Map Grid References 164 Menu Download 64 Menu ltem Categories 118 Menu ltem Departments 117 Menu ltem Picklists 137 Menu Items
31. Solutions 8 2 1 List of Access Permissions Preferences 215 During an Aura upgrade a newer version of BackOffice or Invoicing may require new activity codes to be added this is done automatically during the upgrade process With the exception of certain access permissions new permissions will default to being prohibited from most employees including the default FRCH franchisee employee category In addition to this due to information links in the database activity codes that are no longer in use in a new version may not be removed completely W While reading through this list of permissions each permission is structured to give the most useful information possible Next to each access permission a Suggested minimum access permission level is shown in brackets described below Keep in mind that these are only suggestions you may still grant or deny any of these permissions as you see fit Adminis shown if the permission requires a high level of access such as store owners or technicians and should not be changed by the average user Permissions marked as admin have a large effect on the trading or security of your store Manager is shown where the store manager may need access to ensure that the store can be maintained effectively User is shown for permissions that are safe for any employee with access to Aura These would include cashiers drivers or waiters where applicable List of Activity Codes Listed
32. Step 1 of 3 Flat Suburb Employee Details Street Postal Code NextStep Employee Settings Enter the required information for the employee being added Required fields e Employee e FirstName e LastName The other detail fields on this page are recommended but optional The Employee must be unique to this particular employee Aura BackOffice will not allow you to save this employee if this employee number is already in use Although the remaining fields are optional itis recommended for legal and security reasons to store the extra information in your Aura system Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 105 Employee Discount and Access Control Settings Once you have enough information to identify your new employee click on the Next button You will be presented with the following window Insert a new employee Employee Settings Back to Configure employee access and roles Employee Details Category Kl Colour L Black Set Password Check Set Fingerprint Clear Fingerprint Iv Does Deliveries Step 2 of 3 Employee Settings i ls A aitron Invoice Discounts Mas Discount Percentage Mas Discount Value Stall Discounts Max Monthly Spend it Next Step Max Discount Percentage Su eee Max Discount Value i tC Category Click on the down arrow and select the new employee s category from the drop down list W If the category you are tryi
33. The category filter is used to filter the menu items that are displayed This will not change any menu items this will only restrict the items that are displayed for the current session Show Active Inactive This filter is used to show either the currently active or inactive items only 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 150 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Item Description Stock Code This code is the identifying code for the stock items and must be unique to each stock item Category Displays the stock category that the currently selected stock item is assigned to Click the E button next to the drop down list to access the Stock Categories h4 Stock Type Displays whether the currently selected stock item is a Food Cost or Non Food Cost item Food cost items will be treated differently to the non food cost items in certain sales reports This will be explained in each report affected by the stock item pricing Desired Level Enter the desired level of stock o be kept on hand at any given point in time This feature works hand in hand with the Stock Issues report as well as the Order Manager application with a more detailed description found under each section Exclude from Worksheets Selecting this option will remove the selected stock item from your stock take worksheets and stock takes regardless of whether itis marked as a controllable item or not Description Displays the full description for the s
34. Used to reasign a table order to a different waiter This access permission is no longer in use This access permission is no longer in use Version 6 3 9 216 Access Permission To Change Menu Item Groupings To Change VAT Rate To Close A Table To Close Any Table To Close Off Someone Else s Till Shift To Confirm Credit Card Override To Convert Collect Order To Delivery To Convert Delivery Order To Collect To Delete A Customer Record To Delete A Menu Item To Delete An Attendee Record To Delete An Expense Payment To Delete Unsaved Invoice Line To Determine Which Activities Require Authorisation To Discard Stock To Do a Partial Quantity Adjustment To Edit a Posted GRV To Edit An Already Assigned Invoice To Edit An Already Assigned Table To Edit An Existing Stock Take To Edit An Expense Payment To Edit or Delete an invoice line To Edit Posted GRV Lineitems To Edit Stock Take wthin 24 hours of posting To End A Till Shift BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Access Level Manager Manager Waiter Cashier Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Admin Wa Admin Manager n a Manager Manager Admin Manager Waiter Cashier Admin Admin Manager Admin Manager Cashier To Exclude External Location Sales From n a Cashup To Exit GUI View To Issue waiter floats To Lock A Till Shift To Maintain Access Control To Maintain Employee Categories To Maintain Employee Details To Maintain
35. a wud a vende e E EEE 56 TUIESAMECASMUD Saonara a a 59 ShOp Gas hup apra a a E a a tebtueaneeunncuneauunceevend 63 Cat Menus ciri eee a a a hie Ea ttt aU a tae 64 Synchronise lt 11teeeseeeeeseeeseeeee seen ee eeeeeccnneeeeeeeeeaeeeccnaeeeeeeeesaseescaeeeeeeeesaseescnaeeeeeeeesensescneeeeeeeeesassessnnneees 65 Capture Operating Expenses rrreresereeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeccnnneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeseescceqeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensanneeesessogns 65 Transactions Purge NOMAD Log s1steeeseeeeeseeeeenee seer eeeaeeecnaneeeeeeeeeesessnaneeeeeeeesasessnneeeeeeeeeesessnnneees 67 Export Data Exporter seerssseessseeeeeeeeeeseessseneeseeeenaneesnneeeeeeeesnesssaeeeeeeeeeessessqeeeeeeeeeesessssqneeeeeeeeeanneags 68 Backup Database sserseeeeseeseeeseeeseecneeeeeeasecneeeeeenaescneeeeeeasecceeeseesaesceeeseenaseseeeeaeeesesseeeeeeessesgneeseenaneas 68 Plugins wseeeeeeeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeeeenanneeeeeencnaaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaneessscccaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeesesscceqeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeennans 69 Add ne Soeren E A sent teree cote temeurevtn 72 DesioMm FIOOrS sananen A AE ENEE E ACA 72 Database QnuimiSe Fr serrana a 76 Database PULE idaron a e a E a E demesne 77 SBIFGCELSWEEDER amper S 80 Report Scheduler aina an aee ONE E E Aeee A Ea a E aE E E E E 82 Update Customer Stats 1111111111rrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneeeeennnnnnnnnnnn 97 Lists 99 And invoices ceee ea tanec liad a
36. above it If you have a menu item that is only ever rung up through a picklist and never on It s own itis advisable to de select Don t Print Selecting this option will prevent this item from printing on the customer s slip This is most often used on instructions for the kitchen staff W Keep in mind that by law the customer must see all paid for items on their slip and therefore this option is only available to menu items that have the price setto zero RO If Don t Print is ticked on an item with a price above RO when saving the following message will be shown Information 1 Only menu items with a zero price can be marked as Don t Print Optional Item This option is used in large chains of stores with a single head office to manage the menu This feature is described in more detail further on Prompt for Quantity Selecting this option will make nvoicing bring up a quantity prompt whenever this item is rung up on an order Price is Locked Selecting this option prevents cashiers and managers from overriding the price of the selected menu item Report Group With report groups setup itis possible to categorise the menu items with more flexibility on the reports These groups can be created for many different reasons the most common of these however is for a combo store where two different stores share a property and a single server computer Items ae now be assigned to Report Groups by a wizard For mo
37. activate this plugin and set it to only run on the server QO The AEC Check plugin can be enabled for all tills however it will only have any effect on the server computer as that is where AEC2 is installed In order to achieve this the plugin must first be enabled and then the appropriate till ID selected In the example below the plugin is now activated however in the current state this will be active on all till IDs not only the server M Settings Only use on these tills 1 SERVER ILC 2 MAINT 3 MAIN 4 MAINS To restrict this active plugin to only one computer place a tick in the box next to the relative till ID and name In the example below the server computer has a till ID of 1 and a computer name of SERVER M Settings fw Use this plugin Only use on these tills O 2 MAINT O 3 MAINZ 1 4 MAIN3 Server computers should always have a till ID of 1 however keep in mind that the computer name may vary from one store to the next Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 71 At this point any changes made to this plugin must be saved If you select a different plugin in the list before saving these changes will be lost To do so click the Save button located below the plugin settings as seen below Plugin Settings Configure Plugin Settings AEC ChHeck dll v0 0 0 0 Settings 4urasettings dil 1 7 0 0 l AurabyorkFlow dll 1 4 0 0 Iw Use this plugin Custome
38. added Online Orders by Transaction Type 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 10 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Invoicing Fixed Editing and splitting an open table no longer causes an error when saving the new orders Invoicing no longer shows an error when applying discounts while running under another language The note for all invoices is now correctly positioned on customer invoices Apotential crash while working with a new order has been fixed Invoicing now saves more verbose details in the activity log when reprinting a custom slip The Yes and No buttons functions on the confirmation prompt for converting a Collect to a Delivery order have been set back to the correct buttons Improved As per section 26 of the CPA Invoicing now shows the unit price as well as the total price of goods supplied before VAT Plugins and Other Aura Applications Order Manager Fixed An incorrect internal database link was causing the Order Manager to show a GRV is posted error message when trying to add a new purchase order Improved Ifa Head Office code is available for a stock item the Purchase Orders report will this in place of the store s stock number Kitchen Items Fixed The order in which invoices are displayed has been altered to show the most recent orders at the top of the list On computers using fingerprint scanners Kitchen Items no longer shows a class not registered erro
39. be printed on any order that is re printed in this way this is for security reasons Print Store Address on Invoice With this option selected the address as entered in Store Settings 199 will be printed on the customer slip Print Company Name on Invoice This option includes the Company Name as set in the Store Settings 199 on all customer Slips as well Pause Between Copies USB COM Sim Some setups require the use of a USB COM port emulator in some cases the emulator causes a problem when printing multiple slips in quick succession This option will help with preventing this problem from occurring W Do not enable or disable this option unless explicitly instructed to do so by an Aura Helpdesk technician If you are unsure of what effect it will have on your system please contact the Aura Helpdesk for assistance Print Waiter Details on Slip Prints the name and employee number of a waiter assigned to a table on the customer order for that table Print Gratuity Line Leaves a space on the customer s slip for the customer to add a tip Print Customer Survey Prints customer survey image at the end of certain order types Paper Type This option only affects the older wide profile A4 dot matrix printers and will have no effect on the newer narrow thermal and dot matrix printers Contact the Aura Help Desk for more information Copies This is a dead setting printer copies are handled for each printer individually under Pr
40. careful of and shows a description of the optimise process You should only run this application at the direct request of a qualified Aura Help Desk technician When the purge is run you will be presented with the following screen Confi rm w As the Database Purge application changes information in your database directly for safety reasons the application will not continue unless a backup is performed first Database Purge Screen Click on Yes to backup your database and proceed to the options screen Once the backup completes you will be presented with the following screen Database Purge ver 1 1 0 0 Delete data prior to 2009 08 20 k Delete Resize Log File bbsql_log To 512 MB Fesize nactive Delete data prior to lt date selector gt The first option allows you to select the date from which you would like to keep sales data Everything stored in your database prior to the selected date will be purged W Database Purge will not allow any data newer than 18 months old to be removed from your database Resize Log File The database log file contains a history of all actions performed on a database including the action used during the Database Purge functionality by default the log file size will adjust depending on the number of actions performed While being useful this automatic size adjustment is extra work for the server to perform while purging data Itis highly recommended to se
41. charges a delivery charge that charge will be added to the driver s wages for each order Blind Cashup Prevents the cashup screen from showing the NET Sales Gross Sales Credit Cards GRVs paid from till or whether the till is over under Essentially the cashier doing the cashup on their own till will enter their cash on hand their credit cards and any petty cash payments The manager will only be able to see if the till cashup balanced once the till is posted and locked Till Settings Tills Cashed Up Separately This option is no longer applicable as all tills are cashed up separately by default now Disable Employee Wages If your employees are paid either an hourly wage commission or delivery charges selecting this option will disable all those wages This setting affects ALL employees regardless of their employee category Disable Petty Cash Disallows cashiers from entering any payments in the Petty Cash section of their till shift cashup Tills cannot be LOCKED if Invoices are outstanding Check for any orders that have not been paid Any till shifts are open Checks to see if any till shifts are not ended and posted Drivers are not cashed up Checks for any drivers that have not yet been cashed up posted into an active till shift Shop One Shop Cashup Per Day Selecting this option will prevent any till shifts being activated on a date that the shop cashup has already been posted Cannot open tills if previou
42. control on your keyboard you may To selecta series of items ina row click once on the click once on an item to toggle it s selection status This first item and while holding Shift on your keyboard click will allow you to select multiple individual items on the last item This will select all items in between the first selected and the last selected 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 136 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual With the desired items selected you may now choose to enable or disable the Optional In Use setting for all selected at the same time To enable the selected optional items click on the single left arrow as seen in the example below al Optional Menu Items CO Menu Items Added Menu Items es All Meru Items Humber of menu items to add 40 Search Filter ICE CREAMS POWERADE TROPICAL STORM IMPULSE CARAMEL KING CONE BAN sCill Ls HEAVEN STRAWBERRY BONSOE A BONAGUA LEMON LITE BONAQUA NAAR TJIE BONAGUA STRAWBERRY LIPTON LEMON 1 5L LIPTON PEACH 1 5L LIPTON LEMON BUDDY LIPTON PEACH BLIDDY BUDDY SCHWEPPES GRANADILLA 2L SPRITE ZERO 2L FANTA ORANGE 2L FANTA GRAPE 2L SCHWEPPES LEMON BUDDY SPRITE ZERO BUDDY SWEPPES LEMON MANGO ORANGE 500ML TRU FRUIT i LLELE HOC HEAVEN BROWNIE Items moved to the left have been highlighted To quickly and easily enable Opti
43. desired name and press Enter on your keyboard as seen below _ Picklists Example Picklist ample Picklisl To add menu items to the picklist click and drag the desired menu item from the Menu Items list onto the new Picklist and then let go of the mouse button Take note of the mouse pointer as seen below _ Picklists Menu Items Categories Example Fucklist nen A aha STILL WATER DAMS Wishes i Search bonaqua f By Description Code Size Description DAMS SOOME AGUA MONTE STI 1 PDAMSP ou SOOM Ls ADUA MONTE SPA DBL 40M L BLACK LABEL Entire Menu Categories can also be included in a picklist To add a category switch from the Menu Items list to the Categories list by using the tabs at the top Once on the category list you may add the category to the picklist the same way as the menu items Adjusting Picklist Pricing If the items in the picklist need to have a price assigned this can be done in the bottom of the Picklist section of the window as seen below Picklist Selection Price Same Price as Selected Menu ltem Compulsory Humber of selections allowed The drop down list has the following options Largest of Same Type Selecting this option will set the price of all menu items in this picklist to be the same as the highest price of any item in that same category Same Price as Selected Menu Item This option will leave the price of the menu item t
44. enables reports to be run with preset parameters on timed schedules whether a user is at the computer or not All reports found in Aura BackOffice can be set to run in a report schedule as new reports are added in the future the Report Viewer will also have access to them The Report Scheduler is used to create and maintain schedules for reports that are run on a regular basis for example the Gross Profit report the is required at the end of each trading month or an employee Activity Log once a week to keep track of what the employees are doing In addition to the ability to create a schedule for any report in the system the generated report can be saved or sent in one of three ways each of which have their own advantages Using either Email Adobe PDF or Printer the reports can either be printed out at a store level for the manager saved to the desktop for later reference or emailed off site for store owners to keep track of activities in the store W Before making use of the report scheduler there are a few points you need to be made aware of If you require assistance with checking any of these options on your server computer please contact the Aura Help Desk and speak to one of our help desk staff members e The Crystal Reports Print Engine CRPE requires a printer with an A4 page size to be installed on your server computer Page settings such as size orientation and margins are pulled from a printer configuration e
45. for the customer imaging display Rotate Image Delay Select the number of seconds each image Is displayed for in the customer imaging display screen saver mode Display Price While Scrolling Tick this option to display the menu item price in the customer imaging display screen saver mode Invoice Display Invoice Item Message Enter a header line for the menu item display on the customer imaging display Invoice Total Message Enter a header line for the invoice display on the customer imaging display Browse Image Delay Select the number of seconds that each menu item image is displayed for while processing an order Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 207 8 1 3 3 6 Stock General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email AutoFill l Auto fill manufactured stock grid Auto fill stock purchases grid The following two options are designed to speed up and simplify both the stock manufacture and stock purchase Ww processes in the Aura software By selecting either of these options the affected section will have all items previously manufactured or purchased into the current date with a 0 amount set as the yield or purchase depending on the section affected After doing so all that is required to complete the process is to insert the correct amounts in the desired stock item or items AutoFill Auto Fill Manufactured Stock
46. is being discarded from Stock locations are part of the advanced stock control features of BackOffice For more information see the section 7 on Stock Locations 15A To Location This is preset as Wastage for this screen and cannot be altered Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 List of Stock Items The lower section of this window lists all stock items that have been discarded on the selected date 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 52 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual New Entry for Discarded Stock Items To send stock items to your wastage location first select the Date the stock was discarded from the top left of this screen Once on the correct date for the discard click on the ii button to show the Stock Item Selector window For more information see the section on the Stock Item Selector 37 After selecting the item you wish to discard you should see the following screen Transfer Stock Stock ltem A6 CANS oy Luantity Prepped Comment Measure 5 Cancel Stock Item This will display the selected item for discard If you wish to select a different item click on the E to return to the Stock Item Selector Quantity Enter the quantity of the item to be discarded Take note of the unit of measure further down when entering the quantity Prepped If the stock being discarded has already been prepared tick this box If itis from the store
47. llr Activities for Cashier 19 To Access The Menu ltem Selector DRY Driver Count Stock FACH To Adjust Invoice Line Quantity To Assign Driver To uthorise Discounts To Cashup a Waiter Franchisee EIT Kitchen Staff MGA Manager TRAM Trainee Manager WTA Wraitron To Close Table To End 4 Till Shift To lesue Waiter Floats To Modify Captured Surveys To Modify Invoices Deny all 7 Grant all fh Manufacture Search Clear Search Stack Prohibited Activities for Cashier 195 To Abandon An Invoice To Access Expense Categories To Access Expense Items To Access Expense Payments To Access Menu Items To Access Stock Items To Activate Or Disable Plugins To Add An Expense Payment To Add New Menu Ikerns To Alter Menu Item Descriptions To Assign ltem To External Stock Location To Authorise a Transaction Refund To Authorise Any Staff Meal To Authorse Own Staff Meal To Browee Old Invoices To Browse Shop Cashup Data Monitoring Rollback m Retail License License Renewal Date 28 June 2010 Employee Categories Section The left hand section of this window lists all current employee categories setup in your system Allowed Activities for lt category gt The upper right hand side displays the currently allowed activities for the selected employee category Denied Activities for lt category gt The lower right hand side displays a list of activities that are prohibited for the sel
48. movement during the selected report period Resolved a discrepancy with stock paid from till between the GRV Cashup and Control Sheet reports The Stock Variance Reports are now correctly taking the manufactured stock yield values into account The calculation for wages on the Income Statement was not matching other reports Various conditional labels relating to VAT and Discounts on the Sales reports have been fixed to show the correct settings selected The Stock Variance report now takes unsaved or unbalanced GRVs into account in it s calculations as well 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 16 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Improved The list of available reports when creating a new schedule has been extended to prevent cutting the list short on Windows 7 The description text for One Time schedules has been reworded to be more clearly explained When creating a new Batch Report schedule the window will automatically focus on the Name field as itis opened The reports list when creating a new report schedule are now ordered alphabetically All references to time have been altered to display 12 hour times with AM and PM indicators for more clarity The Cashup Wages report has been updated to show sub totals for each employee who worked for the reported period For clarification when setting the start and end dates for a report inside a schedule selecting First Day of Week or Last D
49. next record Navigation Toolbar Locate Specific Record This option will open the locate field value window For more information see the section on Navigating Records 27 Filter Dataset This opens an advanced data filter showing only the menu items fitting the criteria specified For more information see the section on Dataset Filter 23 Refresh Costs This button forces a refresh ofall the calculations for the stock costing Clicking this button will update all stock items with their last known purchase price overriding any manual price settings or price errors W Before BackOffice refreshes the stock item costs it does a quick check to see if any items will cause errors in the update If any are found a message such as the following will be displayed Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 149 I x There are 2 items that have a Yield of 0 MDPPC POP ITZ CHUTNEY MDPPJ POP ITZ JALAPENO These stock items will cause the Stock Cost Calculation to fail Please correct these and try again 7366A17A 72D5 4E45 9961 8COC376FFT7F In this scenario the stock costs will not be refreshed until the problematic stock items have been fixed Generally speaking only incorrectly configured manufactured stock items should ever cause this problem if this message shows normal stock items in the list please leave the message on screen and contact the Aura Helpdesk for assistance Category Filter
50. of columns in the order list area Select the Number to be Displayed in the Order ID Select whether orders are shown with your daily incrementing Order Number or with the always unique Invoice Number AutoExpand Invoice Details With this tick box selected as soon as a new order is shown in Kitchen Items it will automatically expand to show all details Without this option selected the order will only show the Order or Invoice Number along with customer details if applicable Only Display Items For Report Group For multi brand combo stores this option restricts Kitchen Items to display only items that are assigned to a specific report group Without this option selected all orders will be displayed regardless of their report group Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 223 Colours Waiting Completed Tabs Switching between these tabs allows you to alter the display colours for new and completed orders Normal Selected Colours Below these settings is a preview ofthe orders as they will be displayed in Kitchen Items ensure that the font colour is not the same as the background colour as that would render the text completely unreadable Font Colour for the text face its elf Background Normal Colour for the background of the order block Background Selected Colour for the currently selected or highlighted order Pending Tab This tab contains the colour settings for the
51. of your application error messages in Aura now provide a few different options with more detailed information As seen in the example message below amp Aura Invoicing Version 6 3 8 35 Application Error Access violation at address O19430ED tn module SUraLicensingclent dil Read of acdress FFFFFFFC Phone Support 066 100 AURA 2872 eB Copy To Clipboard Email Support g Internet Support Exception class EaccessViolation Exception message Access violation at address 01944306D 1 Exception address OLSASO6D Stack list generated 4012 08 24 10 05 15 AM OO00Z06D AuraLicensinglliente dll 01943060 OOOOLBLS Invoicing exe 004019 System fGetHem Line 00004310 Invoicing exe 00405310 System fWNewsansistrin 00004333B Invoicing exe 00405335 System GLotrFromPCha OOOO4EY Ys invoicing ene 00405773 System G Lotrlopy Li lt gt When an error such as this occurs the Details button will toggle visibility of the error Most of the time this will not be necessary but itis made available in case you would prefer to check exactly what details will be sent with the Email Support feature Support Options Copy to Clipboard This option simply copies the entire error log to your Windows clipboard just as the Windows keyboard shortcut ctrl C will do This is useful if you need to send the error via other means or paste it into another application W These stack traces contain a lon
52. of your store This feature is aimed at stores that deal mainly with Table Transactions to simplify the interface for waiters to ring up and maintain their own table orders When opening the Design Floors feature you will be presented with the following screen Add Remove Before setting up the floor plan you will need to have a table list set up in your store For more information see the section on Adding and Maintaining Tables h7 Activities 73 Top Toolbar Save Use this button to save any changes you make to your floor plan Load Use this option to load the currently saved floor plan layout aran t FP vi Customize Use this option to change the colour settings for your floor plan layout Ss Selecting Customize will show the following window Eolours i gt Times Table Neglected 10 Door Red Table Final Neglect 15 z Window Olive Table Pol Time 10 Fortal Aqua Table Empty va gt Table Occupied lime 8 Table Neglected iGreen l Table Final Neglect Macon l Ok Cancel Under the Colours section you can select the colour you would like the different items will show up as Under the Times section select the number of minutes before a table order is updated to show Neglected and then the Final Neglect warning The Table Poll Time is the number of minutes that it takes to update the screen with information entered from other compute
53. on Expense Items and Categoriesliic After selecting the expense payment you wish to capture click the OK button to continue This will display the following prompt Payment Date This date is automatically entered as the Expense Payment current date Paymert Date 16 Apr 2012 Expense Item Displays the name of the selected item to Expense Item Clear Table Protector capture an expense item payment for If you wish to select Supplier GAME a different item click on the ie button to return to the Reference Expense Item Selector Quantity 1 Supplier Displays the default Supplier for the selected or item You may change this by selecting another supplier Amount Paict 120 from the drop down list Cancel Quantity Enter the quantity for purchase according to the unit of measure Amount Paid Enter the amount paid for the above selected item and quantity After entering the required figures click on OK to save the payment You should see a screen similar to the following Paid Expenses ee ee ee e Expense Entry C Subbateaan ltem Description Supplier Quantity a F ESPS EXP Clear Table Protector ae 3l Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 67 5 6 Transactions Purge NOMAD Log The Purge NOMAD Log feature allows you to remove older information from your NOMAD Credit Card log w This option will only function correctly if you have a NOMAD Credit Card sys
54. option Activities will display a window similar to the following Status of current transactions o x Click A Column To Search g leei e a Cooked Allocated 1 Table rc 69 70 8 02 AM 12 00 AM 2 Table 31 60 6 05 AM 12 00 AM 4 Table 53 60 6 36 AM 12 00 AM 5 Table 15 90 6 40 AM 12 00 AM 3 Table 146 50 8 43 AM 12 00 AM Table 113 00 9 00 AM 12 00 AM o Table 162 30 9 01 AM 12 00 AM 6 Table 136 40 9 12 AM 12 00 AM 10 Table 10 90 9 14 AM 12 00 AM 11 Table 26 90 9 22 AM 12 00 AM 12 Table 26 90 9 34 AM 12 00 AM 15 Table 44 0 9 36 AM 12 00 AM 16 Table 53 70 9 41 AM 12 00 AM 14 Table 37 20 9 42 AM 12 00 AM 18 Table 24 50 9 46 AM 12 00 AM 20 Table 72 10 9 49 AM 12 00 AM 9 Table 127 20 9 59 AM 12 00 AM oT 4 To navigate through the list of orders use the scroll bar on the right hand side of this window to scroll up or down Or to see more information relating to each order use the scroll bar along the bottom of this window to scroll left or right To aid in searching for a specific order you may sort the data by any of the columns For example to sort the list by the invoice amount click on the Total column header Press the Close button to close this window Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Monitoring 181 7 2 Daily Sales The Daily Sales menu option will display a summary of trading information broken down into each transaction type and with a total amount for the c
55. order Unsorted ASP Incl RA 0 00 Inv Descr HO Code FSP Excl F 0 00 Slip Descr Size Cost Price Ho recipe After adding all required information in the fields above you will need to click on the button to save the item Keep in mind an item must be saved before a recipe can be added for this item this is to ensure the recipe and menu item are linked correctly You may view the links below for more information on extra menu item options a You may also edit a current menu item if needed with the item on screen click on the button to unlock the item for editing This will allow you to edit the item information w You cannot change the item code on a currently active menu item doing so will show the following error message information x This item has been sold under the old code and cannot be changed J Please add a new item with this code and make the old item inactive T426BADF D93C 4E36 B608 CSEDOEDT EIA If for some reason a menu item does require a new item code this menu item must first be marked as inactive and a new item created with a new code Extra Menu ltem Specific Options Below the Menu Item section of the window you will be presented with additional options relating to the menu item You can switch between theses extra features by using the following row of tabs Recipe Other Coloring Screen Saver Barcode For more information see the relati
56. pending line items in a new order Colour Waiting Completed Pending Time Outs Modify Time 30 Seconds Modify Colour E Lime Deleted Colour il Red Hormel z 106550 01 08 STATUS WAITING Selected Modify Time This timeout sets how long after a new item is added that the colour background should be applied In this example a new item will be highlighted as lime green for 30 seconds before it reverts to the standard background colour Modify Colour Set the colour that the new item line will show Deleted Colour Set the colour that a deleted or voided line will show Time Outs Tab Colour w aiting Completed Pending Time Outs First Timeout 180 Seconds Final Timeout 300 Seconds First Colour O Money Greer Final Colour E Red First Timeout Final Timeout 5 106550 01 08 STATUS WAITING 1 SUFER COOPER SANDWICH 2 LEMONADE First Timeout The length of time before an invoice hits the first timeout is set here First Colour Select the desired colour for the first timeout here Final Timeout The length of time before an invoice hits the final timeout is set here Final Colour Select the desired colour for the final timeout here Q Remember that these colour settings will over ride your selected background colour for the orders Keep your selected font colour in mind when selecting an appropriate colour All tabs of the Colour section pro
57. production or credit card printer under Printer Setup For more information see the section on Printer Setuph9 Type None Narrow Wide Impact Narrow Select the type of the selected printer Model Epson PosiFLEX StarposTSP700 Epson Impact To ensure correct printer formatting please select the model type of your printer Page Length Page Width and Footer Height The above three settings are governed by the printer drivers you do not need to adjust these settings atall Print Late Voucher This is currently a dead feature it will not make any difference to the printing of either customer or production slips Extended Production Slip Only applies to production printers Selecting this option will print a slightly modified production slip with parent items printed more clearly and their child items printed directly below them 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 212 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 2 Access Permissions The Access Permissions screen provides the features to restrict the level access each employee category has to the Aura system For security and consistency reasons permissions are set up by category instead of each employee individually This screen can be accessed by selecting Access Permissions from the Preferences menu F BackOffice Employee Permissions 29 Ioj Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Employee Permissions Employee Categaies
58. prompt this will present a window similar to the following example Plugin Settings Configure Plugin Settings ESE CCheck dll 0 0 0 0 ip Settings 4urasettings dil 1 7 0 0 l AuraworkFlow dll 1 4 0 0 F Use this plugin Customers tats dil 0 0 0 0 Labour anager Plugin dil 1 1 2 0 l LicenceCheck dll 1 7 0 0 Only use on these tills TimeSync dll v1 7 0 0 Alist of currently installed plugins can be seen on the left hand side of this window take note that this list will differ from one Store to the next depending the plugins installed on the server To the right of this list settings relating to the currently selected plugin can be configured 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 70 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual By selecting a plugin on the left the settings to the right will become available to you as seen in the example below Plugin Settings Configure Plugin Settings AeCCheck dilvOU00 p Settings 4urasettings dll 1 7 0 0 l AuraorkFlow di 1 4 0 0 Use this plugin Customers tats dil v0 0 0 0 Labourld anagerPlugin dll 1 1 2 0 LicenceCheck dll 1 7 0 0 Only use on these tills TimeSync dll v1 7 0 0 1 SERVER 2 MAIN C 3 MAIN2 4 MAINS In this example the currently selected plugin has been installed but is not currently active On the right side the list of available till IDs has refreshed and each till ID registered on the server is displayed Now we will
59. right buttons will only move items that are visible after using the search filter 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 144 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 8 Items Per Sales Location Asales location specifies the Stock Location that the recipe ingredients are taken from This feature is only really helpful in the case of either a combo store or if the stock in your store is counted and managed in two separate stock locations As the Sales Locations options link menu items to Stock Locations these locations must exist in your Aura WJ system before continuing For more information see the section on Stock Locations 15 W In order for this feature to function correctly keep in mind that the stock items used in a particular menu item must L be included in the stock location in question For more information see the section on Stock Items per Location 59 Working With Locations When using the Items Per Sales Location option you will see a window similar to the following we BackOffice Menu Items Per Report Group Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Menu Items Per Sales Location Sales Location k A Current Sales Location Default Count Stock Search A tems Included in Default M Excluded _ Categoy Cade temblese is Grouping Categom Code rae DRINKS 2L SCHWEP 2L SCHWEPPES LEMON LITE mila DRINKS D2LCS 2L CREME SODA 3 DRINKS DA AFPPLETIZER DRINKS DAMS AQUA MONTE STIL
60. selected in the tree view to It s left will be shown here 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 84 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Creating Report Schedules As there are many variations in how a schedule can be created the common features will be described first and information on working with individual sections explained in detail thereafter For more information on any of these areas see one of the following options e Creating a New Report Schedule 85 e Customizing Report Schedules 94 e Running Schedules Manuallyl9e w Depending on how many reports you include in a report batch schedule you may find the server computer less responsive while the reports are being run However this will not affect the system while in between schedules For this reason it is recommended to set the schedules to a period of time outside of your normal store trading hours lf the computer system gets shut down overnight or the store trades 24 hours a day then you should set up the schedules to run ata time when the store is not as busy and Invoicing or BackOffice are notin constant use Report Scheduler Settings The settings panel for the Report Scheduler is used to configure the email account used for emailing report schedules It is highly recommended to use your shop s email account for this as it will be shown as the email sender when the message is opened on the receiving side Sender Name Jsmip cosoftdbn co za 74
61. stock item options Editing Stock Items h In order to edit a stock item with the item on screen click on the button to open the item for editing This will keep the information currently saved for the selected item and allow you to edit the required information Once again you will need to click y on the button to save any changes made to the stock item Ww Aura will not allow you to change the stock code on an active item allowing this will cause errors in the menu structure affecting not only Aura Invoicing but all stock item theoretical sales related reports as well If changes require a new item code this stock item must be marked as inactive and created with a new unique item code Marking the item as inactive is done by ticking the Inactive box just below the Prepped Cost field See the main screenshot at the top of this topic for more information Extra Stock Item Controls Below the tem Description section of this screen you will find extra options for each stock item These are located under three different tabs as seen below Recipe Ordering Deposit For more information see the relative topic below e Recipel154 e Ordering 150 Depositl15 e Stock Costing 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 154 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 7 2 1 Recipe The Recipe tab is used to create the master recipe for a manufactured stock item This is essential for the correct calculation of the
62. the Item Description Enables size detail to be shown in the description for an item Auto Print Labels When an order is marked as Done Kitchen Items will print the labels automatically Use Employee Colours Each employee may have a unique colour assigned to their employee record If this option is ticked employee specific colours will be used as the background colour for any order assigned to them The following two options should only be enabled on dedicated Kitchen Items computers Start with Windows With this option ticked Kitchen Items will be launched every time the computer is turned on Allow Windows Shutdown by pressing 0 When selected exiting Kitchen Items by pressing the 0 key on the numpad will shut the computer down as well Filter by Enabling the first filter option will cause Kitchen Items to only display items that are assigned to the selected Report Group See Lists gt Menu gt Items 115 for more information Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 221 Filter Tabs Four tabs are available for setting custom filter options for the data displayed in Kitchen Items Each tab has a single tick box at the top to enable or disable the particular filter in order to avoid having nothing displayed you should only have one filter active at a time Within each filter you may select as many options as you require including multiple tills or multiple production printers 9O Whe
63. the report attachments do not open Q The Email option in this case will first export the reports to PDF and then attach them to the email to be sent Although these temporary PDF documents are deleted automatically once the email is sent you may set a custom location for the files to be stored If no custom location is set the report scheduler will use the root of your C for the temporary files i W Before using the Email output option for any schedules please ensure that your email settings are configured correctly If the sender email account settings are not valid the report scheduler will fail to send the report schedules email The settings panel is covered in the Report Scheduler gt Settings 8 section Completing the Schedule Once the report batch has been configured with a name the desired reports the schedule times and the output destination the final step is to configure the individual report settings and save the schedule The section to follow will cover these two processes Itis highly recommended to do a test run of any schedule once it s been saved If you have selected an inappropriate date range for any of the reports and would prefer to run it over a different date range you will only see this once the schedule is run The Ron Now option runs with the saved schedule settings without waiting for the scheduled date and time to run See the section on Running Schedules Manuallyl 96 for more informa
64. to fix customer phone numbers by adding your default dialing code to incomplete numbers Using this feature will display a prompt similar to the following This will add your default dailing code 033 to all of your customer s telephone numbers that are 7 characters or less Cancel fED406043 1659 445F A 44F 4044 704EDF 34 Q There are a few important points to keep in mind This will only affect numbers stored in the Phone field as described further below It will not alter phone numbers that are more than 7 digits as they are considered to already have a dialing code Any phone numbers with 7 digits or less will have the preset Default Dialing Code added to start of the number For more information on setting the Default Dialing Code see the section on Store Settings 199 Update Customer Stats This will invoke the same process as the Activities gt Update Customer Stats 97 menu option Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 113 Adding New Customer Records ue ee caer oad To add a new customer press the button This will display the Customer Information screen Customer Information l i x Statisti Phone 033 FiName ROTI 30 Day Ranking ase Cell LiName Last Discou nt Orders Email Addr Spend Histo Previous 30 Da 1 Year Street lt NOT SELECTED Invalid Street Name or Street Segment Residential Other de
65. to the category on the left This is done by dragging the picklist from the middle Picklists column over to the category that has just been assigned to the Categories With Picklists on the left Resulting in a similar structure to what is shown below Items with Picklists Menu hems with Picklists Categories with Picklists 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 140 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 6 Kitchen Printer Wizard The Kitchen Printer Wizard is used to specify which production printer otherwise called a kitchen printer each menu item will print to When an item is rung up inside Aura Invoicing two print commands are sent one for the customer s slip and another for the production slip The Kitchen Printer Wizard picks up the production slip print command and sends each menu item to the production printer according to the list set here Amenu item may be set to print to more than one production printer or no production printer at all But itis recommended that all items are sentto the production printer or at least one if you have multiple kitchen printers Item Printer Wizard Menu ltems Filter All DRINKS DRINKS DRINKS DRINKS O DRINKS _ DRINKS _ DRINES _ DRINKS DRINKS DRINKS DAINKS DRINKS __ DRINKS _ DRINKS _ DRINKS C DRINKS DRINKS DRINKS _ DRINKS DRINKS O DRINKS DRINKS _ DAINKS C DRINKS DRINKS DRINE S Men
66. use this feature to set which items show on your controllable only stock take and which don t For more information see the sections on Controllable Stock Take Worksheet and Controllable Stock Takel 38 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 151 Manufacture Selecting this options marks the selected stock item as a manufactured item as opposed to a purchased item This will change the behaviour of this item in many stock related areas of Aura oF An item that is marked as Manufacture will not be available for a stock purchase this item will only be available WV from the Manufacture Stock screen An item that is not marked as Manufacture will not be available for manufacture this item will only be available from the Purchase Stock screen Auto Manufacture The auto manufacture feature was implemented to simplify the manufacture process on some items This involves a slightly different approach to stock items selected as auto manufacture items for instance these items cannot be purchased or manually manufactured their stock usage is calculated as required by the menu items sold i For Auto Manufacture to calculate the stock to be used it must first have a master recipe saved For more inf X ormation see the section on Manufactured Stock Recipesh5 There are some very important points to keep in mind before using this feature though as the process is different to the standard manufacture process The
67. will display the following screen Pi Aura Update J e Update Complete Aura is up to date Br You already have the most recent version of Aura installed on your system Please click Close to exit The above message confirms that you already have the latest released Aura software version you may click on Close and continue as normal 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 228 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Downloading Updates If an update has been found you will see the following screen with information about the upgrade You can use the scroll bar on the right hand side to see all changes and fixes in the available version Aura Update There is an update available Here is a brief summary of the changes in the update Release Notes Software Tracking Version 5 7 Updates e ST 29 Returning Stock It is now possible to receive money from a stock return into an active till shift ST 220 Flagging of Invoices To Upload Corrected the flagging of historical invoices to Back Cancel a Keep in mind that the section inside the white block of the above screen shot contains a brief summary of updates 7 changes and fixes in the new version The upper mostline will display the version number of the new software version Click on Next to download the update which will move on to the following window Mi Aura Update Downloading Ale Please w
68. you may choose how the items in this picklist are charged for Compulsory Inside nvoicing itis possible to cancel a picklist allowing only the parent item to be rung up on It s own By selecting this option the menu item will only be added if the picklist is completed as well Number of selections allowed If you have multiple options inside this picklist and the customer has an option to choose two or three of them set the number of available selections here Picklist Item Selection Size Seeing as an entire category may be specified in a picklist as you will see further down you may specify only a certain size group inside that category to be available This will be described in more detail further on Menu Items Categories right panel This contains a list of menu items and menu categories that can be assigned to a picklist The Menu Items can be searched by entering either the unique item code or by the description For more information see the section on Menu Item Codes and Descriptions 119 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 138 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Creating a New Picklist To begin you will need to right click in the Picklist column and select New as seen below Picklists New hs By doing so this creates a picklist called New Picklist This should now be highlighted To change the name simply left click on the name again You should now be able to edit the picklist name Type in the
69. you will see the window shown below Table Selection a x So F2 Table Number C F3 Status F4 Smoking Pa et Pe a ue TatieNum Status Smoking Capacity gt Sort These three option change the sort order of the tables list as we will see further down F2 Table Number F3 Status F4 Smoking Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 Table List This will list the currently available tables in the system Adding New Tables To insert a new table click on the w button from the toolbar this will display the following window x Number Smoking No Capacity 4 gt coe Number Enter the table ID number If your store already has table numbers on the physical table use these numbers here Smoking Select whether the table being entered is in a smoking section or not This defaults to No due to the fact that not all stores have a section available for smokers Capacity Enter the seating arrangement available for the table This option defaults to 4 you may change it if need be Once all the required information has been entered click on the OK button to save the table Repeat this process for all tables required in store 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 178 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Sorting Table List Once all the tables have been added you can sort the list by the Sort options atthe top of the screen
70. your store discounts or over rings maybe required on a daily basis both of which require a reference code and description in order to be properly tracked in the Aura POS system e Discount Codes 174 e Over ring Codes t68 Preparing for Stock Purchases Due to the way information is maintained in Aura all stock movement in and out of the store must be accounted for When receiving stock these purchases must be recorded in Aura and linked to the corresponding supplier e Suppliers 110 Preparing for Customer Orders One of the most powerful and useful features of the Aura POS suite is the customer marketing features In order to enter new customers quickly and easily when they call in to place an order the infrastructure for delivery orders mustbe setup first This is a multiple step process but if done correctly will only be required once e Streets 165 e Customers 11 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions General Notes 32 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 4 General Notes This section covers features and options in Aura that apply to multiple areas of the application At times other sections of this manual will refer to topics listed here See a topic below for more information e Improved Error Dialog 33 e Possible Startup Messages 34 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions General Notes 33 4 1 Improved Error Dialog Instead of simply showing an error message and often requiring a restart
71. 0ml Mineral water Sparkling 0 00 C DR05 Water 250ml Mineral water Still 0 00 m Spnn J nka nnn There are two methods for selecting items one is to click in the boxon the left placing a tick in the box the second is to highlight the item using the arrow keys on the keyboard and press the space bar to tag the item Once all desired items have been selected click the OK button to close the Menu Item Selection window Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 175 Math Quantity 2 Menultems Categories 7 Appl Options k Appl To Cheapest Matching bem Get For Fre E Get o iteme for free Apply Discount Ta K Apply discount to f items After adding the items you can review the list of items this discount will apply to in the lower right hand corner of the Auto Apply Discount setup window as seen here In this example the discount that these auto apply rules are being added to will automatically apply to one item Apply Discount To section when any two of the listed items are rung up Match section atthe top Chicken Tikka Chicken amp Mushroom Large Chicken Per Peri Large Four Seasons Large Regina Large Hawaiin Large Mexican Margherita Apply Options Apply to Cheapest Matching Item When a range of items are added to the list of possible matches itis likely that they have different prices Selecting this option will cause the discount to be applied t
72. 158 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Removing and Editing Stock Locations a To remove a stock location highlight the stock location and press the button To edit a location use the a button Editing a location will bring up the same window as found when creating a new location Simply change the information you need and click the OK button to save Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 159 6 7 4 Items per Location When a second stock location is added by default it does not have any stock included in the location This will need to be set up from the Stock Items per Location screen Selecting this option will present you with the following screen BackOffice Stock Locations E O x Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Stock Items Per Location Foa Stock Location S Current stock location Default Count Stock Search ca Stock Included in Defaul stock Exluded trom Detal lt lt ITEMDESC StockNo Stock H4001 A Pamphlet Distribution ADDS A Menus Ey 3 A004 A Other Advertising Ano A Balloons E Retum Stock Iga aT A Balloon Sticks BOO Torpedo Subs Booz Ciabatta Bread a Manufacture con Mozzarella stock cooz Cheddar Slice gt 9 Coos Feta CO05 Grated Cheddar Misca CODE Grated Parmesan Stack COS C Floor Cleaner Ea Coi4 C Refuse Bags Fis Coie C Cres iitasl Stock Location Current Stock Location Use this drop down list to select the stock location you
73. 3 Jun 2009 I Discard Stack Employee Til Shop Emp Full Name Clock In Time Clock Out Time lt a 01 System Added By 2009 06 22 08 23 45 4M Tranafer CAS System Cashier 2009 06 27 08 4345AM 2009 06 22 03 14 57 PM Stock DAW Spstem Driver 2009706722 08 52 45 AM 2009 06 22 05 12 29 PM WTR System Waiter 2005 06 22 11 48 45 AM 2003 06 22 08 06 05 PM E zl ER Time Wages Travel Wages Delivery Wages Commission wages Cashup Summary t Wage Summam Diver Payment Calculation S Time Wages R 0 00 Total Orders R 0 00 x T j Travel Wages R 0 00 Delivery charges Excl VAT ownloa Pan e R 0 00 Float R 0 00 E EN ages R 0 00 Faid Already Credit Card Tips R 0 00 Wages R 000 Menu Total Wages R 0 00 Payouts R 0 00 Activat Lists Nothing Owed R 0 00 Monitoring ae Post Payouts Surveys Preferences Retail License License Renewal Date 06 June 2010 The Employee tab will show a list of employees that were active on the system for the selected cashup date To view information for each employee select the employee from the list at the top and below that you will now see their own cashup information To view more specific information select one of the detail tabs below the list of employees Each tab will show more specific information regarding the currently selected employee Drivers and Waiters must be posted before moving on to the till shift cashup If your employees are all paid a
74. Apply to Current Filter This button shows the colour scheme that the selected menu item will use inside Invoicing Clicking this button here will apply the colour scheme to all menu items within the current filter Apply Category Colour to Item This button displays the colour scheme set for the menu category button Clicking this button here will apply the category colour scheme to the menu item that is currently selected Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 133 6 6 3 4 Screen Saver Recipe Other Coloring Sereen Saver Barcode gt Screen Saver Settings C Display as of total sales C Display as of category sales Select items to export to the Aura screen saver this setting must be selected for each menu item individually The screen saver is not activated by default in an Aura installation Contact the Aura Help Desk for more information 7 on setting up the screen saver 6 6 3 5 Barcode Recipe Other Coloring ScreenSaver Barcode gt Menu Item Barcode Settings Bar code Pe Read Quantity From Barcode Barcode Displays the barcode currently scanned to the selected menu item Read Quantity From Barcode This feature is used to read the quantity of the selected item directly from the barcode when an item is rung up in this manner W International standards for barcodes do not allow space for the quantity as well therefore this feature will only be available to store
75. Attendance Report Disable Schedule Delete Schedule At this point the scheduler will prompt for a date to run the schedule in relation to This will be used as the base date to run the reports in the batch from all in relation to the date selected When running a report schedule manually the calculated dates for reports in the batch are calculated slightly differently While a report batch run on it s scheduled date will calculate report date ranges in relation to the run date the Run Now option allows you to specify a date to use as the base for the relative dates therefore a report that was set to run from the first day of the current month to the last day of the current month the report will be run from the first to the last day of the selected month With the exception of the relative date everything regarding the reports and their individual date ranges are calculated as though the schedule had simply run on it s own Ifa schedule was set to be emailed then this function will email each report in the batch as per the schedule settings Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 97 5 11 Update Customer Stats The Update Customer Stats option is used to manually prompt a refresh ofthe links to the various areas in your customer database Even though these links for example last order placed are updated automatically when the customer is assigned to an order itis still reco
76. Auto Manufacture feature Recipe for Pre Manufactured Stock tems gt Stock Recipe ield Recipe Cost A 0 00 a search Filter EA e k E FTEa0 30ML TUE amp LID EACH A 0 00 E 0010 ABI TL EACH A 5 95 0005 ABI 2L EACH A 11 32 gt DR BUD ABI BUDDY BOTTLE EACH R 4 97 D z ABI CANS CAM R 3 07 By MI ACC ACCOUNTING FEES RAND A 0 00 AD GEM ADVERTISING GENERA RAND A 0 00 BI DOO APPLE TIZER LAN A 6 45 DAO AQUA MONTE SPARELI EACH R 0 00 E El DA001 AQUA MONTE STILL EACH A 2 95 ag The features under this tab will only be available if the selected stock item is marked as either Manufacture or Sub Menu For standard stock items there is no need for a recipe The Copy Paste and Scale options are taken directly from the Menu Item recipes control For more details on what these functions o please see the section on Copying Pasting and Scaling Recipes 24 Recipe for Manufactured Stock Item Recipe Yield This field displays the resultant quantity that the below recipe will create as per the current stock item s unit of measure Recipe Cost This filed displays the cost of the manufactured item as per the cost of the items included in the recipe below Recipe Items List StockNo Displays the unique stock item code Qty Displays the quantity of the stock item used in this recipe Measure Displays the unit of measure for the stock item Desc Displays the full description of the item Cost Dis
77. CLL COKE LEMON LIGHT Reports DRINES DCL COLA LITE Preferences Retail License License Renewal Date 30 April 2011 Menu 223 StorelD 4 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 143 Report Group The upper most section of this window has you main features Current Report Group By clicking on the down arrow here you may select the report group you wish to edit as seen below Report Group Current Report Group Default Rd Search Default Group 1 Search In order to simplify the process of assigning items you may also type in a word to search for This will filter both the included and excluded list of items for the report group as seen in the image below Menu Items Per Report Group Report Group Current Report Group Default Search buddy Excluded tems Included in lt report group gt The list on the left hand side of this window is a list of items that are currently included in the selected Report Group Excluded The list on the right hand side of this window is a list of items that are currently excluded from the selected Report Group Central Toolbar The vertical toolbar in between the ncluded and Excluded lists contains tools that you will require for including and excluding items from groups Keep in mind that these buttons will work within the search filter This means that using the Include All double arrow to the left or Exclude All double arrow to the
78. CREME SODA 500ML BUDDY FANTA GRAPE 500ML BUDDY FANTA ORANGE 500ML BUDDY FANTA PINEAPPLE 500ML BUDDY LEMON TWIST 500ML BUDDY SCHWEPPES GRANADILLA 500ML BUDDY SCWEPPES LEMON LITE 500ML BUDDY SODA WATER 500ML BUDDY SPRITE 500ML BUDDY SPRITE ZERO 500ML BUDDY STONEY 500ML BUDDY SWEPPES LEMON 500ML BUDDY VANILLA COKE 500ML _ COKE CAN iv Eam a x Cancel If there is a long list of items shown you may filter this list by typing part of the menu item description or code in the VU Search Characters block at the top of the window To view the menu item and it s recipe select the menu item and click on OK 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 126 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Copying Pasting and Scaling Recipes These functions are design to make recipe duplicating for different size items simpler For example let s take the recipe for Chicken Strips Recipe for above item Description Cost A PTE30 1 EACH SUML TUE amp LID R 0 00 GUZE 0 025 L BEQ SAUCE R025 MCST 0 16 KG CHICKEN STRIPS H688 P DFOIL 1 EACH FOIL CONTAINER AOS P DFCL 1 EACH FOIL CONTAINE AOSS POI 1 EACH SERYVIETTES F R 0 06 To use this recipe in aid of creating a larger portion of the same item first copy the recipe to the clipboard with the i button Use the Navigation Bar to navigate to the Chicken Strips Large menu item or create a new menu item if needed and click the l button to paste the recipe Because
79. Default Dialing Code Oven Cook Time 00 08 033 l Show Vat Excl on Invoice Company Settings Business Name Enter your franchise group name here Company Name Optional Enter your individual business name here This is generally accepted as the name you trade under Vat Reg Enter your VAT registration number here this is for legality purposes Telephone Enter the store contact number here Trade Until Select a time in the morning before you begin trading This feature helps to separate one day s trading from the next by marking the time at which the current day s trading begins Anything done before that time will be displayed on the previous day s trading information 5am is arecommended time as it gives ample time for stores that sometimes trade past midnight and leaves enough ofa time margin for opening in the morning Delivery Time Enter a default travel time for delivery orders If a delivery area has a travel time set up Invoicing will use that time if not it will revert to the default time set here Default Dialing Code Optional Enter the dialing code for your store s area here Branch Enter the unique identifying branch name here This is generally accepted as the area or shopping centre that your store is in Vat Rate Enter the value added tax rate here Vat Rate Not Zero By selecting this option Aura will prevent the aforementioned Vat Rate from being accidentally or deliberately set to a zero p
80. Employee Passwords To Maintain Menu Categories To Maintain Menu Prices To Maintain Over Ring Reasons To Maintain Reporting Companies To Maintain Stock Categories To Make A Stock Location External To Manufacture Stock To Mark Any Invoice as a Late Delivery To Modify A Clock Period To Modify Captured Surveys Manager n a Manager Admin Wa Manager Manager Admin Admin Wa Wa Admin Admin Manager Manager Admin Manager Version 6 3 9 Description Used to set menu item links to Report Groups and Sales Locations Used to set the VAT Rate in the system settings Used to close a table order assigned to the current employee Used to close a table order assigned to any employee Used to end a till shift started by another employee Used to manually capture a credit card sale with NOMAD Used to convert a collect order to a delivery Used to convert a delivery order to a collect Used to remove a customer details record Used to remove a menu item This access permission is no longer in use Used to remove a saved Expense Item Payment Used to remove an item from an order before being saved For cashiers use the permission to void items instead This access permission is no longer in use Used to access the Discard Stock screen Used to manually adjust the item quantity with decimal places in an order Used to adjust details of the GRV header once the GRV has been included in a posted till shift
81. Float R 0 00 Paid Already Wy ages R 0 00 Payouts R 100 00 Store Owes Employee R 100 00 Surveys The Surveys button is used to capture any surveys from the customer slips This survey is printed out on table orders only and must be set up on your server computer To set up these questions in Aura see the section on Survey Questions 1 15 w The survey that prints out on customer invoices is taken from an image in the Aura program folder Please contact our Aura Helpdesk if you require assistance with this option Clicking the Survey button will present you with the following window Capture Survey E E X Capture Multiple How Was our service Was our store clean and tidy Rate Your taste expenence Once the slip survey ratings have been added up for each employee from the slips select the block for the appropriate rating for each question type the number of customers that gave that rating and press enter on your keyboard When the surveys have been captured successfully for this employee click on the Close button to continue with the cashup process These surveys are Summarized in the reports for more information see the section on the Survey Ratings Report 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 58 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Posting an Employee To post an employee select their name from the list and press the Post button in the lower left side of the cashup screen This will s
82. Grid Selecting this option will affect the Manufacture Stock screen in the aforementioned way Auto Fill Stock Purchases Grid Selecting this option will affect the Stock Purchases screen in the aforementioned way For more information see the sections on Manufacture Stock 47 and Stock Purchases 41 8 1 3 3 7 Search General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleUisplay Picklists Updates Email gt Customer Search Include in customer search Email W Cellphone W First name W Last name F CRM Customer Search Using these options you can select which customer detail fields can be searched in the Customer Lookup window from Invoicing Email This allows searching by the customer s set email address This is not a very common detail but may be used in the case of online orders Cellphone Allows searching the customer by the number set in the Cellphone field Recommended option First Name Allows searching by customer first name Recommended option Last Name Allows searching by customer surname Recommended option CRM Customer Related Marketing Selecting this option allows the Customer Search screen to search information inside the CRM tab in the Customer Details screen For more information see the section on Customers h1A De selecting an option will not prevent Invoicing from displaying or accessing that particular field it will affect only X the search window
83. L WATER Return Stack DRINKS DAMSP AGUA MONTE SPARKLING Wwe DRINKS DAMS T AGUA MONTE STILL 1 5L SA DRINKS DBA BOMAGLUA APPLE MINT Blan tacte DRINKS DBI BONAQUA LITCHI Se DRINKS DBL BLACK LABEL DRINKS DEN BOMAGIUA NAARTJIE pr DRINKS DBS BONAGUA STILL DRINKS DET BONAOUA STRAWBERRY Discard DRINKS DBWAM BONAOUA APPLE amp MINT Stock g DRINKS DEWL BONAGILIA LITCHI A DRINKS DEWLL BONAQUA LEMON LITE DRINKS DEWN BONAQUA NAARTJIE Transfer DRINES DBMS BON4OUA STRAWBERRY stock DRINKS DEWSS BONAGUA STILL DRINKS DEWST BONAOQUA SPARKLING DRINKS DE COKE DRINKS REIK 1L COKE DRINKS DEZL 2L COKE DRINKS DE350 COKE 350ML CUP DRINKS DES00 COKE 500ML CUP DRINKS OCE BUDDY COKE I _ DRINKS DCR BUDDY COKE ZERO Monitoring DRINKS DECLL COKE LEMON LIGHT Reports DRINKS DCL COLA LITE j H Preferences Ill Retail License License Renewal Date 30 April 2011 Menu 223 StoreID 4 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 145 Sales Location The upper most section of this window has you main features Current Sales Location By clicking on the down arrow here you may select the sales location you wish to edit as seen below Sales Location Current Sales Location Default Search Cold Room Search In order to simplify the process of assigning items to sales locations you may also type in a word to search for This will filter both the included and excluded list of items for the selected location as s
84. Menu Overvew 116 Menu Items Overvew 119 Menu Items Barcode Settings 133 Menu Items Button Colour Settings 132 Menu Items Other Settings 128 Menu Items Screen Saver Details 133 Menu Items Setup Recipe 122 Monitor Daily Sales 181 Monitor Staff Activity 180 Monitor Staff Attendance 181 Monitor Staff Performance 182 Monitor Staff Statistics 184 Monitoring Menu Overview 180 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Index 235 Multiple Shop Cashups 205 _N Navigation Toolbar 24 Network Settings Overvew 210 New Employee 104 NOMAD Credit Card System Setup 197 NOMAD Transactions Log 67 O One Shop Cashup Per Day 205 Only Print New Items 190 Operating Expenses 65 Optimise Database 76 Optional Items In Use 134 Overlap Buttons 195 Over ring Reasons 168 P Pack Size Stock Items 156 Password Add Employee Login 104 Password Edit Employee Login 108 Password Lifetime Setting 202 Path for Backup 208 Payment Screen Close Delay 188 Persist User 188 Picklist Settings 209 Picklists 137 Pole Display Settings 209 Pole Display Setup 196 Preferences Menu Overview 186 Print Customer Survey 190 Printer Settings 190 Printer Setup Overvew 192 Production Printer Assigning 140 Production Printers Setup 193 Program Settings Overview 201 Prompt for Head Count Table Orders Only 203 Prompt to Print On Payment 190 Purchase Orders Delivery Address 199 Purchase Stock 41 Purge Database 77 Q Quick Payment Tender Amo
85. Op 514 1 22 Jun 2009 22 Jun 2009 001 W When posting the final till shift in the cashup Invoicing will check to see if there are any outstanding orders before allowing the shift to be ended and posted This process is described further below for now we will assume there are no outstanding orders L After all tills have been successfully posted you may now lock them Press the Lock button in the lower left corner of the screen as seen here Aras Mm Wt R 0 00 Post Lock 5 Open Til F12 This will prompt you for your password and then ask for confirmation before locking the shift as seen here About to lock till shift ty E J Please note Once a shift has been locked it can not be unlocked and no more changes can be made to the tillshift Lock till shift 514 Repeat this process until all the ns till shifts have been posted and locked 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 62 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Cashup Safety Options All invoices must be paid into a till shiftin order to complete the cash up correctly if there are any orders still outstanding when attempting to end and post the last active till shift Aura will check to see if any orders are outstanding or if any employees are not posted and give you a chance to rectify the problem before ending the shift W These checks for outstanding orders and un posted employees are dependant on the cashup settings i
86. Purchase Stock 41 Last Manufacture Date If the selected item is a manufactured item as opposed to a purchased item the last manufacture date will show here Last Manufacture Cost This field will display the last cost of manufacture for the selected stock item For more information see the section on Manufacturing Stock 47 Waste This will display the preset wastage percentage of the selected stock item Prepped Unit Cost Displays the cost to your store of using one measure of the selected stock item For more information see the section on the Wastage Percentage l15 and Prepped Unit Costl154 of your Stock Items Starting New and Editing Old Stock Takes To begin a new stock take or edit a previously stock Take Settings posted stock take click the New Edit button on the ci m ock Take Date Location toolbar above the Stock Take Details section After a Enter the CLOSING stock for A T E password prompt you will see the following screen 28 October 2010 Locatint Select the date for which you need to enter or modify the closing stock figures the location for your elect Wee Ol store Lake stock take and whether or not it is a complete stock Controllable Stock Items Only take All Stock Items or a partial stock take Controllable Stock Items Only Then click on OK to proceed F Stock locations are available for advanced stock control from one section of the store to another or from your store
87. Record a oe Insert A Hew Supplier P Adding new suppliers is as simple as clicking on the 7 button from the toolbar This will bring up the Insert a New opaa aE Supplier screen as seen here Contact Telephone 1 Fax Address 1 Address 2 City Enter in the required details for the supplier and press the OK button Note that OK will only be available after Postal Code information has been entered into the Company Name field Email Accounting Code a Cancel W Do not use any special characters in any of the suppliers details characters such as gt lt may cause problems with areas that use supplier details To edit any supplier you can either double click on the Edit An Existing Supplier supplier s name or you can click once on the supplier and A Mone press the a button This will allow you to edit the Contact Lara O00 supplier s details Terane misra Fax 0833060028 Address 1 hii Address Z Po cyf sts s Postal Code fF OE Email O0 Accounting Code Doo O O or Once you have a supplier successfully added you may now create a purchase order from this supplier 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 112 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 4 Customers The customer s list is essential for delivery and collect orders but a customer can also be assigned to table and counter orders Assigning customers to orders plays a vit
88. SP Incl and RSP Excl These are the Retail Selling Price including and excluding the VAT amounts Cost Price This is the cost to store according to the stock item recipe For more information on this see the section on Stock Item Recipel 22 Item Gross Profit Items with a recipe cost to company and a sales price income to store has an effect on the store Gross Profit figures This pie chart gives you an indication of how each item will affect your GP Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 121 Adding New Menu Items W The following section is only applicable to stores that create and manage their own menus For larger franchise chains that download their menu from a central head office store location these options will most likely be locked out by default and cannot be changed All steps hereafter are described with the assumption that the menu is not locked for editing and that you have the required access permissions to enter the required information In order to add a new menu item begin by clicking on the button from the top navigation bar After doing so you will notice the Menu Item fields become blank ready for the new item information to be entered as seen below Navigation H H _ x LE m B Category Filter aLL Show Active Refresh All M A e e a E e e E E Field View Spreadsheet View ltem Gross Profit Menu Ite ltem Code Category Sort
89. Sales Ex O R A zal a0 Manufacture Less Discounts A 608 90 Stock 400 Delivers Charges RA 700 Net Sales R 6 735 40 2 Coupons A 0 00 Discard Credit Cards A 0 00 Stock Cheques FA 0 00 Cash On Hand A 233 30 A Debtors R 0 00 1 Petty Cash A 0 00 ransfer Stack GAW Paid A 0 00 Employee Wages A 0 00 Gay sie a Addit Banking FSI F 0 00 Cashup Driver Floats FI R 0 00 Float Issues F11 FA O 00 Till Float F10 A 500 00 E Gratuity A 0 00 Lists Under By R 2 10 Monitoring Reports Preferences Retail License License Renewal Date 06 June 2010 The Shop Cashup screen consists of the shop cashup list and summary This should only have one shop cashup in the list and this screen acts both as a summary of all till shift cashups as well as providing the final step for ending the trading day Don t expect the whole shop cashup to balance perfectly every day of trade due to the rush in most businesses and the fact that change must be exchanged itis not very common that a shop cashup balances perfectly W If you have more than one shop cashup in the list or a new shop cashup appears after posting the first ensure there is a tick in the option labeled One Shop Cashup Per Day For more information see the section on One Shop Cashup Per Day under the System Settings 205 To end the day s trading click the Post button in the lower left corner of the screen Posting the shop cashup will complete the shop cashup for the day clearing a
90. Street List in BackOffice has been resolved Trying to access the cashup while it is already open no longer shows an access violation An unnecessary startup error message shown when AEC is not installed has been suppressed Locking the Windows desktop no longer causes BackOffice to crash Aproblem wherein the Stock Take feature did not always request a password to enter a new Stock take has been resolved Activity codes have been updated with the activities To Run Detail Turnover by Day Report and To Run Daily Expenses Breakdown Report The sidebar in BackOffice only provides access to the old report files this section is now disabled while using new reports Sub menu and auto manufacture items are now correctly excluded from the lists shown in the Manufactured Stock and Stock Take screens Production printers are showing up correctly again when first loading the Menu Items screen Various problems causing access violation error messages in the Picklist Manager have been fixed The Select and Close buttons are now correctly spaced in the Menu Categories window when accessed from the Menu Item Listing screen An inconsistency in the database structure for the menu items listing and invoice line items has been fixed Various activities were being recorded incorrectly in the database BackOffice will now fix the previous issues and correctly Store future entries To prevent accidentally running the Update Custom
91. Street Sweeper Home Screen After the backup completes you will be presented with the following screen listing all your current street names and suburbs a Street Mover ver 1 0 0 6 Corect version of street ACKEMAN STR MEYERSDAL J ACKERMAN PLACE MEYERSDAL AGAFANTHUS STR ALBARTON AKASIA ALRODE ALBANY NEW RED RUTH Albany Road Mew Redruth ALLEN ROAD GLEN VISTA L ALMA STEYL MEVYERSDAL ALMA STYIL MEYERSDAL J ALWYH STREET BASSONIA _ alzia ave GLEN VISTA AMFIBOL RANDHART ANGELIER BRACKENDOWNS ANNEKE GLENVISTA ANNEKE STR GLEN VISTA ANTBEAR ARNOLD ALRODE ASPARAGUS NEW MARKET AUBYN NEW RED RUTH AUSTILL NEW RED RUTH AUSTIN EDEN PARE BAMBI MAYFIELD PARE BAMBOES BRACKENDOWNS _ BANDOLIER ALBERTSDAL BANKSIA AVE NEW MARKET Neg Incorrect version s to be replaced ACKEMAN STR MEYERSDAL ACKERMAN PLACE MEYERSDAL _ 4GAPSNTHUS STR amp ALBARTON AKASIA ALAODE ALBANY NEW RED RUTH Albany Road Mew Redruth ALLEN ROAD GLEN VISTA ALMA STEYL MEYERSDAL ALMA STYIL MEVYERSDAL ALWYN STREET BASSONIA C alzia ave GLEN VISTA AMFIBOL RANDHART ANGELIER BRACKENDOWNS ANNEKE GLENVISTA ANNEKE STA GLEN VISTA ANTBEAR ARNOLD ALRODE ASPARAGUS HEW MARKET AUBYN NEW RED RUTH AUSTILL NEW REO RUTH AUSTIN EDEN PARE BAMBI MAYFIELD PARK BAMBOES BRACKENDOWNS BANDOLIER ALBERTSDAL BANE SIA AVE NEW MARKET
92. TB3O 30 ml TUB amp LID EACH PACK AGING P ner EON CORITAINER bine FACH Stock take details would be captured under the Prepped and Unprepped columns on the right Capturing Stock Take Data To capture stock take details into Aura simply select the relative stock item and enter the figures using the keyboard With a field selected the contents will automatically be replaced by the figure you type as seen below Category Stock Iter description Measure Value Prepped Unprepped JI DRINKS bon APPLETIZER Can R 0 00 76 if DRINKS D BO0QST Bonagua Sparkling Each MiP AIRS MANA FEINT CFE Bonk Fark Bann The Prepped column is used for stock that has been prepared for use already ie drinks that have been moved from the store room to the fridge in front flour that has been taken out of the store room to the kitchen etc The Unprepped column is for bulk stock that has not been prepared for use yet Certain items may not have any difference in the calculations between the prepared and unprepared stock levels while other items will This is governed by the stock item wastage percentage setting Certain stock items are bought in a different form to that which is used in your store for example cheese may be bought in blocks and then grated before being used on a pizza In this aforementioned example the cheese stock item would require a wastage percentage to be set in order to cover for pieces of cheese that fall off the cutting boa
93. Table Selection F j X Table Selection F x F 1F2 Table Number Oe raun Sasson Cans fon sas Satie Sorted by Table Number Sorted by Status Open False Closed False 4 3 Closed False 4 4 Closed False 4 5 Closed True 4 6 Closed True 4 T Closed True 4 conc Sorted by Smoking Not Smoking QO In this window you may also use the function keys F2 F3 and F4 on your keyboard as shortcuts to sort the list The Status column displays as Closed when the table is notin use and displays Open when an order is currently active on that table As you see for table 1 in the above tables Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Monitoring 180 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 7 Monitoring The Monitoring menu contains features relating to the store s active trading information These features are designed to allow the managers and franchisee to see information regarding sales information employee attendance and employee performance statistics in real time from one location See a topic below for more information e Activities h8 e Daily Saleslish e Staff o Attendanceha o Performanceh8s o Statistics hsA 7 1 Activities The Activities menu option displays a list of currently active orders Depending on the types of orders this list may contain table orders delivery orders or collect orders Counter orders will not show here as they are closed and paid for immediately This first
94. Used to modify a delivery order after being assigned to a driver Used to modify a table order after being assigned to a waiter Used to modify an already posted stock take Ifa stock take is less than 24 hours old Aura will use To Edit Stock Take within 24 hours of posting listed below instead Used to modify details of an Expense Item Payment Used to modify or remove items from a saved table delivery or collect order Without this items may still be added Used to adjust details of the GRV stock items once the GRV has been included in a posted till shift Controls access to a newly posted stock take less than 24 hours old Used to close a till shift started by the same employee This access permission is no longer in use Used to close the Table Plan view in Aura Invoicing This access permission is no longer in use Used to lock a posted till shift in the cashup record Cashiers will need this if they are to cashup their own tillshifts Used to set access permissions per employee category This access permission is no longer in use Used to add or edit employee details Used to edit an existing employee s password Used to access the Menu Items Category screen Used to modify menu item prices this option is hidden and does not prompt for a password This access permission is no longer in use This access permission is no longer in use Used to access the Stock Items Categories screen Used to mark a stock location as
95. Viewer has been fixed Improved The start date calculation on the Orders by Supplier report does not need to use the system trading time Each report has been updated to correctly show a No Data message when applicable Stock reports have been updated to show Food Cost and Non Food Cost headings in place of the previous Stock Type 1 and Stock Type 2 headings When new reports are added to Aura the relevant access permissions are inserted automatically without requiring an update to BackOffice The Till Cashup Summary and Detail reports now show the employee number and full name of all till shift operators The Report Scheduler now allows you to stop and start the service from inside the application itself The reports menu generated for BackOffice can now be translated into other languages All reports have been updated to allow all text labels headings and graphs to be translated The category description field on the Item Sales by Category report has been extended to prevent long names from being cut off The Orders by Supplier report only used for Order Manager now checks if the required tables exist before being run All sales reports grouped by day now correctly use the trading day time as setin the System Settings for more accurate reporting at 24 hour stores The Time and Attendance report has a new option to show the employee s weekday and non weekday total hours separately Report schedules will no longer run u
96. WERADE ORANGE POWERADE NAARTJIE zL SPRITE BUDDY SPRITE IMPULSE KING CONE MEGA zL CORE LIGHT POWERADE ISLAND BURST POWERADE TROPICAL STORM 2L SCHWEPPES GRANADILLA Added Menu Items left panel Optional Menu Items All Menu lkeme Search Filter POSTCARDS 2L CREME SODA CORE CREME SODA DIET SPRITE zL FANTA FANTA GRAFE FANTA PINEAPPLE GINGER BEER GRAFETIZER WHITE IRON BREW LEMON TWIST LIPTON TEA LEMON LIPTON TEA PEACH ORANGE FRUIT JUICE SPRITE SPRITE ZERO SCHWEPPES DAY LEMON SCHWEPPES GRANADILLA SCHWEPPES LEMON SCHWEPPES LEMON LITE Listed here are the optional menu items that are currently in use All Menu Items right panel This list shows all optional menu items that are not currently in use this panel also provides options to filter and search items in the list Center Toolbar The vertical toolbar in between the two lists contains tools that you will require for enabling and disabling optional items Keep in mind that these buttons will work within the search filter Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 135 Searching and Filtering List Before we look at how items are added or removed from the list of optional items in use lets first cover the search and filter functions The Filter option works as a drop down list with all your current menu item categories as seen in the example image below All Menu bens Search Filter Menultem ooo
97. a counter order only store would not need to over ring an order on account of a late delivery For this reason the over ring reasons can be altered as needed BackOffice Over ring Categories a O x Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Over ring Categories ft eee PS PS ee PS aes eee VIEW Active Q gt gt Description Active Hoa OverRingRet gt Ef fb Count Stock SER EYEE SEE EY PEE EY PEE ES PPE EY PEE PYLE PY PEE PST Purchase Stack r ws Return Stock Manufacture Stock D Discard Stock Lab Transfer Stock Monitoring Reports 2 Retail License License Renewal Date 27 June 2010 Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 si Click this button to force a refresh of the over ring reasons list View The view drop down listis used to filter the over ring reasons list to display either active or inactive codes Over ring Reasons List This list will display all active or inactive over ring codes as per the view filter Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 169 Adding Over ring Reasons l a To insert a new Over Ring code click on the button from the top toolbar lolx Description Reference I Active Hoax OK Cancel Description This is the description that will show on the reports this name will be displayed in Invoicing Reference The reference code generall
98. a good solid understanding of the why and how factors these processes become nothing more than simple daily tasks There are many features that set Aura apart from other point of sale systems each of which will be covered in the relative sections throughout this manual below is a quick overview of the most predominant features in the Aura Point of Sales Software Suite Stock tracking calculating on purchases returns stock counts stock use and wastage Multiple stock locations both in store and external Manufactured stock create unique stock items in store Employee access control set access permissions based on employee categories In depth customer list store customer details and order history Audit trail see what your employees are doing through a comprehensive activity log Verbose report system over 150 reports for various purposes Notes on this User Manual Certain areas of this manual will refer to information covered in either the introduction or a previous section these areas will assume that you have covered prior topics that relate to the topic at hand This manual will also assume that you have an employee record with complete access to the Aura POS system If you are the store owner and do not have access to a particular section of your system please use the Contact Details e331 to get assistance from the Aura Helpdesk If you are not the store owner and need assistance you must contact yo
99. a runtime schedule uses default values for the incomplete entries Saving a newly created report batch as disabled now correctly updated the active state before checking and running lapsed schedules The Run Now function now works correctly from the tree view of the report scheduler as well The Gross Profit report has been set to use available stock take figures directly when using the Fixed Stock Costing system setting The Beverage Incidence report now shows the correct number of orders even if there are none with drinks for comparison The Hours Worked value displayed on employee cashup reports now displays the exact same value used to calculate employee s hourly wages Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Software Changes 9 A problem that might cause the Monday label to be incorrect on the Royalty Report has been found and fixed Apotential ratio calculation error on the new Monthly Beverage Incidence report has been fixed The Report Scheduler has extra checks in place to prevent unwanted emails being sent from schedules on the same day they expire The Category Sales report now correctly checks the Show Vat Exclusive Amounts in Sales Reports system setting In some 24 hour trading setups the Gross Profit report was calculating the theoretical stock usage incorrectly An access violation when running certain reports on Windows 7 has been resolved Amemory leak in the initialisation of the Report
100. access permission and reporting purposes When the employee categories listis opened you will be presented with the following screen Employee Categories Manager CASHIER Trainee Manager Franchisee Driver KITCHEN CREW Online Orders Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 Category Displays the unique category code that has been assigned to the category Description Displays a description linked to the category code The list of categories will vary from one store to the next but the most common will include Franchisee or owner Cashier and Manager You can add or remove any category as you wish Take note however that you will not be able to remove a category if there is an employee assigned to that category For more information see the section on Employee Records ho 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 102 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Create a New Employee Category E button This will display the following window If you wish to add a new employee category click on the Hew employee category E x Enter category code ee ooo Enter category description ee o ooo Enter category code Use this field to enter a unique category code a generally accepted value is an abbreviation of the category being added Enter category description Use this field to enter a full description of the category being added Click on OK to save th
101. ackOffice will run the latest available version of the AEC and check to see if there are any newer menu versions available to you for download Keep in mind that for larger store chains you will most likely receive a message from your head office that a new menu will be available Menu Activate Once the menu has been downloaded it is first stored in a temporary table until you are ready to activate the new prices By selecting this activate option the downloaded menu will then be set as your active menu and all relevant items and prices will be updated Q Remember that you do not need to activate im mediately after downloading a menu if a new menu is downloaded and the included prices are only valid for a future date you may safely leave the downloaded menu as inactive until you are ready to activate it For security reasons the currently active menu is not deleted completed but simply moved into a backup table Menu Undo If there is an issue with the new menu and you need to go back to your previously active menu use this option By performing a Menu Undo Aura will retrieve the price list stored in the previously mentioned menu backup and restore those as your active menu W Itis important to understand how this feature works before using it When a menu is activated the following steps are taken e The currently active menu is moved to become the backup menu replacing anything thatis currently in the backup e Next the dow
102. ader Settings l Prompt for Gratuity Amount Timeout for Credit Card Dialogs 0 Disabled 20 ig NOMA F Use NOMAD Nomad DLL Path This should be blank by default Only set if cannot connect normally Subtenant 2Uotenant iY Prompt Cashier asking if Credit Card slip printed Prompt for Gratuity Amount This option enables a prompt for the cashier to capture the waiter s tip through a credit card transaction Timeout for Credit Card Dialogs 0 Disabled When processing a credit card payment the dialogs can have a timeout count down Default is 20 seconds on inactivity before the dialog closes but this can be adjusted as you See fit Use NOMAD Selecting this option will enable Invoicing to integrate the NOMAD credit card system and enable the two options below Disabling this option will use the manual credit card capture interface Nomad DLL Path The path to the Nomad DLL Dynamic Link Libraries can be entered here Important note this should be blank by default and should only be set by an Aura technician if the NOMAD system does not automatically find the required DLL Dynamic Link Library files Subtenant Where combination stores are involved especially when sharing a server computer itis very possible that all brands in the store will make use ofthe credit card system as well Setting a Subtenant specifies a category for the credit card sales These subtenants are sent to your bank s credit card system
103. ae aa aea ec a Ea A aa aaa a aE Aat 99 Employees rrsttsssstrtrrertnnrrrretnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnneeennnnnnnnnneeennnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnneeeennnnnnnne eeen 101 Employee Categorie S cintan a a a ite navteeuessa sucenweteecemadereecag 101 Employee RECORDS siirre a a aE AAA A a 103 Suppliers sstertttrssssstttrtnnnnnrrrennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnneenennnnnnnnneeeennnnnnnneenennnnnnnnneee ennen nnne ee 110 QT hit osasia E rc rrr rc reer rr 112 Survey Questions lt 1 11teeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeesscnnaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaassseesssgsaaaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaesseesssssonnaeeeeeeees 115 Meni zHacdeneseteaseuneverinn deemenccanlscnemaueineteu E E 116 Departments sceechecicececetcecceuedicivecucetecidecwccsadddcecweuatuee veedes dwscetcadestiecwecusteeudeuesucetenteecsecdecetwedseueeeuevetvedddechuvudencdecvecvenes 117 Categories sassone aa a a aa a EE a a enseasdueueeeuesaceeeuss 118 Rems aenea an eaae e aA AA a a aaae RA Oa aAa aa EENAA aAa a araa aE Aaaa aAA AA NAAA 119 Ophon alltems ssininon n a A E r 134 Pi klists aaae aaaea Aa Aaaa eA aaa KASRA aAA a aN AAA Aaaa a aaa eaaa vetedecdeedecueeueewesteasesssecddenceetctesstecs 137 Kitehen Printer Wizard eiee auena te aaa aaa aaa E a aN AEE a Aaaa a aaa a a aA aE a aoaaa AEN 140 Rems Per Report Group aroetan aa aaa a aia A Aaaa aa AAAA aA Aaaa A a VEASE 142 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions 11 12 13 Part VII 1 2 3 Part VIII
104. ail to Support requires an active internet connection This option sends the support information to a predefined support email address Send Email requires an active internet connection This option allows you to send the support information to an email address of your choice Clicking this button will show the following window F Email Support Information 0 Email Address To Send To _ Any extra information wou with to send Support Info will be appended to this Send Email Enter the email address you wish to send the information to at the top along with any extra information or details in the message block below that When you are done click the Send Email button Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Help 227 9 3 Check For Updates Clicking this option will open up the Aura Updater which will connect to the Alohapos servers to check your current version of the Aura Software again the latest release version If a newer version is available for download from our servers Aura Updater will alert you and prompt to download and automatically install the updates T You must have a working and active internet connection in order to check for updates T When the Aura Update application is launched it will automatically attempt to check for available updates for your Aura POS software If no updates are found it
105. ait while the file is downloaded Downloading from ftp cosoft co za Estimated Time Left 2 50 COCH Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Help 229 Applying Upgrade Patch Once the required files have been downloaded the Aura Update application will close and will run the patch that has been downloaded S Aura Pa tch Once BackOffice and Invoicing are both closed click on Start to continue This will display the following screen with a progress bar of the patch P Aura Patch 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 230 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Ifthe patch applies correctly you will see the following message C Aura Patch Patch Successful The Aura patch is complete Please click Finish to exit this patch When you click on Finish the Aura Update application will show the following message a Aura Update Completed Latest Changes Review the list below for the changes and fixes that have been applied to Aura Update Installed Successfully Click the Finish button below to close the Aura Updater Click on Finish to complete the update this will automatically return you to AEC and open BackOffice Please wait for BackOffice to open completely before running Invoicing If you get an error message at any stage during the patch process please leave the error on screen or write it down word for word and contact our Aura Help Desk for assistance Our techni
106. al role in the customer related marketing features of Aura without customer details If a customer complains or comments on that order it becomes very difficult to link this back to the exact order A customer may also come in and ask what drinks they had with the last order without assigning a customer the order history feature will not function correctly either W If your store does not process any collect or delivery orders you may not need to access the customer list and this feature will quite likely be disabled on your system Please contact Aura for more information on enabling the customers feature in Aura To access the customer list go to Lists gt Customers FP BackOffice Customer View l _ O Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Customers p a a H p a CG zA Wien Active Fix Phone Numbers Update Customer Stats gt _ First Name Address First Order Date La Count Stock p 2011 03 18 07 15 53 F 20 ALICIA 2011 04 21 07 11 45 F 2C A ALLEN 2011 12 16 04 11 10 F 2C prehas ANGELIC 2009 10 28 04 06 52 F 2C Stock ANNON 2011 12 24 03 01 27 F 2C Bery 2010 07 01 07 28 39 F 2C ta PAKICA ANAS SAE Te Te eet ar Personal details have been obscured Along the top you will see the standard toolbar followed by a filter to show active or inactive customers Next to these options are two buttons designed for customer maintenance Fix Phone Numbers Pressing this button will attempt
107. allowing stock to be taken out of your store room with a valid reason By doing so you will also be required to enter the monetary value that you received in refund for these items this figure will have an effect on your stock costing as ithas now changed the over all stock unit cost If stock is being thrown away as opposed to being returned to the supplier as in the case of broken cans or bottles possibly this stock should be recorded with the discard stock feature For more information see the section on Discard Stock 51 Important differences e Stock can only be returned to the supplier they were originally purchased from as seen below e Stock can only be returned on the same date or a date later than when it was purchased wt BackOffice Stock Returns Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Return Stock Return A GEW Date 05 November 2010 EIE Colour Indicators T ae Count Stock ioe o o Fetus Print Bi n aa ae a A Grv Supplier Telephone Supplier Ref Purch Price VAT Grv Saved From Tin gt Purchase Stack When returning stock even if the stock category filter is still set to display ALL you may not see all your stock items in the stock item selector By default Aura only allows items to be returned to the supplier they were originally purchased from Stock Item Selector Search Stock category ALL Description P 30ML TUB amp LID PTE30 ABI 2L
108. as you wish Awizard interface is available for quickly setting which of the optional menu items are currently in use for more Ww information on this tool see the section on Lists gt Menu gt Optional Items 134 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 130 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Report Groups Report groups allow a much more versatile approach to information on reports One of the most beneficial results of an effective report group feature is the ability to accommodate for multi brand restaurants to run effectively off a single server computer This layout minimizes the overheads of buying computer hardware and allows each to access change and report on their own individual stock usage effectively To setup any alternative report groups for each side of your store click on the E button next to the Report Group drop down list This will display the following window Report Group Report Group h r From this window itis possible to add and remove different report groups using the toolbar along the top Once all the required groups are inserted click on the OK button to close this window To select the report group for the selected menu item to be assigned to click on the down arrow next to Report Group and select the desired report group as seen below Report Group Default ey Default i Group Group 2 Sales Locations Multiple stock locations have been a large part of the Aura POS system and
109. ash when deleting a picklist Text label colours in the Floor Designer now display more clearly when the background changes from dark to light Resetting the license in BackOffice no longer shows an error message Posting a shop cashup from the menu options is working correctly again The Floor Designer will not attempt to delete levels if they still contain tables BackOffice now checks for any items that will cause errors before refreshing stock item costs The Select a table promptin the Floor Designer now fits the window properly while using the Windows XP Luna theme When marking stock items as inactive BackOffice will not only check if itis included in any active menu item recipes The timeout period for refreshing shop cashup data has been extended to cater for large customer databases The timeout period for updating historical activity log data has been extended preventing some errors while performing a database upgrade The Picklist Manager now cleans up properly after deleting category picklists which were causing access violations on launch BackOffice no longer shows an error message while attempting to view a list of menu items who s recipes contain a specific Stock item Capturing petty cash entries in BackOffice would sometimes cause an error When working with menu item recipes the Clear Recipe function now prompts for confirmation first Selecting to paste a manufactured stock item s master recipe when the recipe alr
110. ation of this program may only be provided to the customer if there is no other alternative 5 8 Backup Database Itis important to backup your data on a regular basis All your data is stored on the server including your sales purchases employee details the menu and store settings in Aura The location for the database backup is set via the System Settings An automatic daily backup can also be set which will check the age of the last known backup at startup and prompt for a new backup when applicable For more information see the section on System Settings gt Backup 208 When selecting Activities gt Backup from the menus you will be presented with a backup confirmation prompt as seen below Back up database After selecting Yes to this prompt you will be given the option to select a location to backup your database to As seen here Select a folder Browse for Folder E Desktop E G My Documents E F My Computer B s System C 0 _rpes Documents and Settings Inetpub Intel H MSDEINST2005 B E MSSOL7 The recommended backup location is CAMSSQL7 Backup Contact our Aura Help Desk for assistance on selecting a backup location a NYTTA W Aura supports using two backup locations by default as a result this manual backup process will prompt for a location twice If you only keep backups in one location you can safely cancel the second backup location prompt without affecting the backup that
111. ave a pack size the pack field will update with multiples of the pack size Therefore when buying cans as per the above example if 15 cans are purchased the pack field will display 2 5 packs 2 six packs and half a six pack as loose Price The price field has also been improved in this latest version now showing Vat Excl as well as VAT Incl values Previously the VAT was calculated on the GRV as a whole now BackOffice calculates the VAT value according to each stock item individually If one field is filled in the other will be calculated automatically BackOffice still takes the VAT Incl amount divided by the Unit of Measure to calculate the Stock Unit Cost For more information see the section on Stock Unit Costs 57 Stock Location If your stock is being purchased for a specific location you can select a location from this from down list For more information see the section on Stock Locations 15 Location To purchase a stock item directly into a stock location instead of transferring stock afterwards simply select the appropriate stock location from this drop down list The selected stock item must exist in the location first For more information see the section on Stock Items per W Location 58 BackOffice remembers the last purchase location for each stock item individually then automatically selects this location the next time Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 45 Enter in the
112. ay of Week will now show the day name Memory managementin the Report Viewer has been optimised The parameter Period Days has been renamed to Active Period Days for better clarity The Purchases By Supplier reports now also groups items by whether or not they were paid from till The Customer Growth Year on Year report now allows you to select an active period for the report data More information is recorded to the Report Viewer log file to help with diagnosing future problems Default values have been assigned to the drop down list options on each report parameters prompt Generated reports will now always open the report window maximized New Online Order Transactions report online orders will be displayed grouped by payment type Invoicing Fixed An error saving the order while the Display Pending Items option is enabled has been resolved Aproblem with retrieving the saved delivery charge when reprinting a customer delivery order has been resolved When reprinting an order that was paid online this will now be indicated on the reprinted slip for the customer s reference Running the GRV Report from the Stock Purchases section of BackOffice will no longer show the Crystal Reports parameter window Kitchen Items Fixed An access violation error from updating the Kitchen Item settings has been resolved Order Manager Fixed The Orders by Supplier report was not lining up correctly w
113. ble Numbers This is an old setting if a table order is rung up it automatically uses table numbers Grid Size Modifier Adjusting this setting modifies the size of the list of invoices as well as the line items inside invoices The modifier counts up in 0 5 segments next step up from 1 will be 1 5 times the thickness of a standard line etc Use Special Orders Configure Special Orders These options are only available for stores configured to accept online orders placed through a website interface Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 189 Confirmation Amounts New Customers and Other Customers These two amounts are monetary values for the order values of respective customers lf a New Customer s order or a Other Customer s regular order is below the specified amount a prompt will be displayed asking for the cashier to confirm the order amount Specifying Department Displays lf Menu Item Departments have been set up when accessing this settings tab the previously blank section at the bottom of the tab will now display a Departments section as seen below Departments CI Default Department 1 Department 2 Department 3 Remember Last Selected Department Departments Selection Block On the left of this block is the list of currently available departments Tick the desired department s to display by default on this till You can see which till these settings will affect eas
114. ce the printer is under the correct tab on the left click on the down arrow for Device and select your printer from the drop down list Direct to Port Recommended for Production Printers This option forces Aura to bypass the printer drivers and print directly to the port that has the printer attached to it Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 193 8 1 2 3 1 Invoice Printers Invoice Printers ah Printers Creditcard Printers This tab allows you to specify the settings for your customer invoice slip printer Simply select your invoice printer from the drop down listin Device Device l Direct To Port Copies 1 Report None Print line value on kitchen slip I Print totals an kitchen slip 8 1 2 3 2 Production Printers Invoice Printers Production Printers Creditcard Printers Invoice Printers Production Printers Creditcard Printers Device LPT Device fis erver kitchen M Direct To Port Copies 1 M Direct To Port Copies 1 Report None Report None Print line value on kitchen slip Print line value on kitchen slip Print totals on kitchen slip Print totals on kitchen slip This tab allows you to set up your production printer Direct to Port is recommended because of it s speed difference as compared to using the Windows drivers but requires a different method of specifying the device Although you can also selecta printer from the drop down list in Device and
115. cians need the error message to be able to diagnose the problem and find a solution Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Help 231 9 4 What s New Selecting the What s New option will open a webpage listing the changes updates and bug fixes made to the latest version of Aura currently available This information is also available in the What s New section of this help manual For more information see the section on the What s New Sectionl 7 w This feature requires a working and active internet connect to function correctly 9 5 About Aura Backotfice Yersion 6 3 7 0 Copyright 2007 CoSoft pty ltd Coherent Software Solutions Cosoft Support Info System Information Ccosott HD Serial Ho ACCO EO11 http www cosoft co za Computer Name DT HLT ANDREG Aura Support Operating System Microsoft Windows sP http www cosoft co za aura Service Pack 3 Processor Intel A Corel Thy Duo CPU Support Email Address E7500 2 93GHz suppoli aurapos com Memory 2047 ME Support Free Memory fed MB 086 100 AURA 2872 IF Address 10 0 0 170 Close 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 Contact Details Contact Details 233 10 Contact Details Office Contact Details Aura Help Desk 086 100 AURA 2872 Midlands Branch Head Office 033 343 2135 Aura Helpdesk Hours 6 00am to 11 00pm 7 days a week W In order to ensure that all calls taken have be
116. ck Item Recipes 154 W Before you begin please ensure that you have already manufactured the stock item and that you have all the figures that were used in and produced from this manufacture session This feature is designed to capture manufactured stock a BackOffice Manufacture Stock Ax Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Manutacture Stock Operation Manufacture Stock Date fos Movember ani 0 Stock Location Default Manufactured Items poi aai n the 2 ee e i i Keys Ctrl M gt Manufactured items Chi gt Recipe items StockLocation ltemD esc Measure ltemCost TotalCost Use master Yield Han Qty Printed a O C Return Stock Manufactured Items List Manufacture Stack Recipe For Manufactured Item pele Be Be yo Measure gredient ltem Cost Total Cost View Master Recipe Recipe for Selected Manufactured Item Recipe Controls Lists i Monitoring Heno Preferences Retail License License Renewal Date 31 March 2011 Manufactured Items Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 List of Manufactured Items Shows a list of items manufactured on the selected date Recipe for Manufactured Item Displays the recipe used to manufacture the item selected above 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 48 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual New Entry For Manufactured Item To capture a manufactured
117. click on the button to save the question Top add another question simply click on the button to add a new line Repeat this process until all required questions have been inserted Viewing and Editing Questions Once you have the questions entered you may go back and modify certain questions to rephrase or correct errors if necessary Take the example questions below for instance Code Description SARRE How friendy was your wator v s z How did you enjoy the meal M S03 How clean was your table M S04 How prompt was the serice M If you wish to edit any of the questions you may either double click on the question with your mouse or select the question and click on the a button Remember to click on the a button to save the changes 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 116 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 Menu The Aura POS suite uses a recipe based menu system to process item sales the Menu Items hold information related to the sales price VAT rate item recipe and so forth The menu items themselves are also grouped by category and department for more versatility in the menu design W If your store operates independent of a franchise group you will need to use this section to build a menu system for your brand Before doing so please ensure that the stock items have been set up first as these are required to build the menu item recipes a Incases where a menu is downloaded through Aura Enterpris
118. count this employee can assign to a staff meal discount If you leave the nvoice and Staff Discount fields blank there will be no restrictions on the amount of discounts this WJ employee can apply to an order If the employee will not have any access to ring up any orders for instance a driver you can safely leave these fields blank Once you have selected the category and entered a password you will have the option to save the employee Click on the Finish button from the bottom bar to save the employee As seen below lt Back Next gt Finish Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 107 Setting Up Automatic Employee Wages Optional Alternatively If you wish to set up employee s wages click on the Next button to continue You will now be presented with the following screen Insert a new employee Employee Wages Back to sagt Configure the wages and comissions for the employee Employee Settings Hourly Aate Fate per Delivery Commission Percentage l Em Aate Shifts T o D ate Step 3 of 3 Employee Ww ages GES Next gt Bue Hourly Rate Enter a rand value as an hourly pay rate This figure will reflect at the end of the day in the employee cashup screen P Setting an hourly wage means the employee will be paid according to their time period clocked into the Aura system Please ensure thatthe employee knows to clock in as soon as their shift starts and clock outas
119. ct Delivery Table Orders CI 1 DT HLT 4NDREG Original Till ID With this filter enabled you may select to only show menu items on orders that were originally processed on the selected Till ID s 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 222 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Connection and Display Tabs W The Connection tab contains a single option to maintain the connection to the Aura Database Other than the initial setup of the kitchen computer and possibly repairing connection issues you will not need to use this option Display Tab This tab allows you to customize the way orders are displayed on screen in Kitchen Items various options here include background and text colour options along with only displaying orders from certain till ID numbers ensure that you read the descriptions of these options clearly before changing anything Settings For Kitchenltem I X Connection Settings Display No of columns in the completed orders grid 2 Select the number to be displayed in the order ID i Order Number Invoice Nurnber AutoExpand Invoice Details Colours Waiting Completed Pending Time Cuts Normal Selected Font Black Background C White Background fellow Normal Selected 5 106550 01 08 5 10 STATUS WAITING 1 SUPER DOOPER SANDWICH 2 LEMONADE Cancel Top Section No Of Columns in the Completed Orders Grid Adjusting this quantity will alter the number
120. ct the appropriate option from the drop down menu As seen below Edit AutoApply New Rename Delete Once the rule is created you can right click on the rule called New and select rename If you have more than one rule set this will make it easier to distinguish between the different sets Once you have the rule set created you can specify the requirements for the selected rule Using the section displayed below Mate Quantity 0 f Menultems Categories z Apply Options Apply To Cheapest Matching Item Get For Fre Get o items for free Appl Discount T a discount to o items Match Quantity Enter the number of menu items required to match in order to allow the discount Menu Items Categories Select whether to allow those matches need to be specific menu items only or can be any items in a specified category or categories To select the desired menu items or categories click the a button to the right after making your selection This will present the Menu Item Selector as seen below F Aura Invoicing Menu Selection Ioj x Menuitem Selection 0 of infinite Search By Code F9 By Description F10 By BarCode F11 _ 1001 Tables Sit Down 0 00 n002 Tables Take Away 0 00 C DROS Water 1L Mineral Water Sparkling 0 00 C DROS Water 1L Mineral Water Still 0 00 CLER 63ea 2 Oceans Cab 49 90 LR 65ea 2 Oceans Sav Blanc 42 90 C DROSWater 25
121. cted discount as seen below Monday m os oo00 Pa O 08 00 00 RA 12 00 00 AM 12 00 00 AM S O 1200 00 46 12 00 00 AM S In the above example this discount will only be available between 5 00 PM and 8 00 PM on Monday night If you require this discount to be available for more than one period you may also tick the second or third time periods as seen below Monday m 1200 00 PM 05 00 00 PM O 120000 a 02 00 00 Ph EE 00 00 PM 4 12 00 00 AM In the above example this discount will be available for the period of Midday to 2 00 PM as well as 5 00 PM to 8 00 PM on Monday W Do not allow these time periods to overlap For example if the first time period ends at 2 00 PM do notsetthe start time for a second period any earlier than 2 00 PM on the same day This may cause an unsatisfactory outcome in Aura Invoicing for the overlapping time period Once all the desired time periods and days have been set up click on the Apply button at the bottom of this window to save the changes Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 177 6 13 Tables In order to accurately track table orders for seated customers in your store and to take advantage of the advanced waiter and table management features of the Aura POS system you will need to assign the orders to tables The Table Selection screen provides the features for adding the required tables When accessed
122. ctly As the database is active almost all the time this leaves your system settings vulnerable during an upgrade Itis for this very reason that all Aura application must be closed before attempting any upgrade Even so there is a small possibility that certain settings may be inadvertently changed or lost during the database upgrade the Restore System Settings feature is designed to provide a solution for this in the unlikely case that there is a problem The Restore button can be found inside the System Settings in the bottom left corner of the window As seen highlighted here Close Restore O There are a few points to keep in mind while using this feature Ensure that all Aura applications are closed before restoring settings This does not undo the software upgrade it simply restores settings and attempts to complete the upgrade properly This button will restore ALL settings stored in the System Settings including settings found under the Specific Computer and All Computers tabs This feature will cause BackOffice to close and re open automatically Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 187 8 1 2 Specific Computer All settings found under Specific Computer will affect only the current computer regardless of other any other computer settings specific Computer Al Computers Printers Selected Till ooo Computer Name DT HLT ANDREG Copy Till This T
123. d Discounts 176 Touch Screen Settings 195 Trade Until Time Setting 199 Transfer Stock 53 U Ea Update Customer Stats 97 Updates Software Settings 209 Use Fingerprints 196 VAT Rate 199 Version Changes 7 187 Waiter Cashup 56 What s New 7 What s New in Version 231 Wizard Optional Items 134 204 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions
124. d employee category in the Employee Categories column left Adjusting the selected employee category s permissions is done using the following two controls E Move the selected employee category to the Restricted Categories list i Move the selected employee category to the Unrestricted Categories list In the following example the Manager category is currently being edited notice the category selection in the Employee Categories column Currently the Manager category is currently restricted from adding or editing and Franchisee or Owner employee categories but is still allowed to add or edit the Cashier Driver Kitchen Staff and Manager categories If the single left arrow currently below the mouse pointer is clicked the Manager category seen in the Unrestricted Categories list will be moved to the Restricted Categories list therefore preventing a Manager from adding or editing another user assigned to the Manager category ad Restrict Employee Categories Employee Categories i Restricted Categories Controls Unrestricted Categories Cashier Franchisee Cashier Driver Owner Driver Franchisee Hikitchen Statt Kitchen Staff iis ive Manager Owner E P Only a user in the Franchisee or Owner category depending on your business preferences should have access to edit these category restrictions 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Versio
125. d has been included in the Shop Cashup Summary report as found in the Till Cashup Summary report Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Software Changes 13 The graph on the Item Sales by Category report was not following the Exclude VAT and Exclude Discount setting correctly When a report fails to connect to the database it will no longer cause problems for other reports run during the same BackOffice session A typographic error on the Royalty Report has been fixed The Stock Take Worksheet now correctly excludes Auto Manufacture stock items The text labels for the transaction type averages on the Sales by Hour report have been fixed The Sales by Hour reports have been updated to be backwards compatible with SQL 2000 All reports have been tested and updated to prevent division by zero errors The Sales by Hour per Report Group now correctly starts new report group sections on a new page Improved The allowed length of the business name displayed on reports has been limited to 50 characters to prevent access violations in the Report Viewer For better compatibility with some email services the email settings now allows the use of a blank password field The GRV report now includes a section for Grand Totals on the final page of the report The GP Report has an important note in the header with a suggestion on how to identify incorrect stock unit prices Improvements have been made t
126. d text Plugins and Other Aura Applications Fixed Kitchen Items Pressing the order navigation buttons while there are no orders waiting no longer shows an error message Aura 6 3 7 Changes Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed An access violation error message caused by a previous improvement when closing a report has been fixed Apotential problem with how the Report Scheduler queues report schedules has been fixed 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 14 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Improved The Sales by Hour reports now use an Interval parameter with a default of 60 minutes allowing the reports to be run for periods other than simply each hour Aura 6 3 6 Changes Report Viewer and Scheduler Improved The Royalty Report by Report Group now shows the weighted delivery charge for delivery orders in each Report Group Invoicing Improved Aprinted slip layout for Online Payments has been added to Invoicing Orders placed online print two copies of the Online Payment Slip one for the merchant and one for customer Aura 6 3 5 Changes Invoicing New An optional order identification method has been included this system uses a custom word list in place of the order number to identify a waiting customer s order Aura 6 3 4 Changes Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed Sub menu items were being incorrectly included in the Stock Variance and Gross Profit reports Stock purchase reports no longer
127. date etc Not necessary to have this option selected Prompt for Cashier password for Over Rings Selecting this option will prevent anybody except the cashier assigned to an invoice from over ringing the order Preventing one person over ringing other cashier s transactions Cannot print collect order on pay Selecting this option will stop Invoicing from printing the customer s slip again when a customer comes to collect their previously placed order Only primary operator can open the till In a situation where a till shift has multiple operators selecting this will only allow the primary operator to open the cash drawer Enable Editing of Invoices Enabling this option allows employees with the required access permissions to edit unsaved orders and add items to the bill Use Eat In Take Away By enabling this option Aura can better separate orders based on their recipe contents Extra recipe options can be set for an eat in or take away order For more information on Eat in Take away see the section on Menu Item Recipes 124 Force Password Change Every lt x gt Day s Forces all employees passwords to expire after the set number of days asking them at that point to enter their current password and select a new password in order to continue Franchise Print Device Specify the reports printer for Aura BackOffice Print Extended Kitchen Slip Changes the layout settings of all production slips to show the informati
128. ded to the Items With Picklists sections you can now assign the picklist to the item Click and drag the desired picklist from the Picklists column to the Items With Picklists column as seen below Items with Picklists Pca Menu bem with Picklists MARGHERITA PlZ24 4 1 AQUA MONTE STILL WATER DAMS Categories with Picklists AQUA MONTE SPARKLING WATER DAM In the end you should see the following structure under the Items with Picklists Items with Picklists Menu lkemes with Picklists MARGRERITS Ean L1 Mir with Pickliste In the above example From nvoicing whenever the selected menu item is rung up a picklist called Example Picklist will prompt for a Sit Down or Take Away instruction to be Assigning a picklist to a menu category As with assigning a picklist to menu item we can also assign a picklist to a category Doing so will automatically apply the same picklist to all menu items included in that category Firstly change the list on the very right to display the categories then click and drag the category over to the Items with Picklists column on the left Release the mouse button once the mouse pointer is over Categories with Picklists as seen below Items with Picklists _ Picklists Menu Items Categories Menu thems with Picklists Example Picklist TE Categories ee AQUA MONTE STILL WATER DAMS PROMOTIONS AQUA MONTE SPARKLING WATER DAF geese You can now assign the picklist
129. der Fax To Email Host Fax to Email is a popular service that allows a user to email a message to a virtual email address and have it delivered to a linked fax number instead 8 1 3 4 Network Settings Store Settings Head Office Settings Program Settings Network Settings IP Addresses IP Addresses The notepad like block on this page is used to store notes on your system setup Originally intended to keep a list of all computer s network addresses IP Address you may store any notes on the setup of your store here Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 211 8 1 4 Printers Specific Computer All Computers Printers Printer Setup All Printers selected Printer Properties m Description Credit Card ca ne gt Type Narrow Model Epson Page Length 26 Page Width 0 Footer Height 0 gt Print Late Voucher Extended Production Slip T All Printers This is a list of current printer setups inside the Aura software Selected Printer Properties Will display the properties for the printer selected from the list of printers on the left Description The name that will display in the list of available printers under New Printer Settings This is for identification purposes only you can name the printer as you like Category nvoice Production Credit Card The category for the selected printer this will determine whether the printer can be activated as an invoice
130. desired information for the stock item to be entered and click on OK to continue When entering item purchases if the stock item costing has changed compared to the last purchase a warning VU similar to the following will appear Information e Update the cost of 30 ml TUB LID per EACH from 0 27 to 0 29 1 J This represents a 6 689 Increase If this is correct click on Yes to continue Repeat this process until all stock items on the invoice have been entered If the figures entered balance correctly the supplier line in the GRV List section will change from being red As well as the GRV Status bar at the bottom of the Stock Purchases section changing from UNDER BY R to BALANCED As seen below GRY Colour Indicators GAY Date 28 October 2010 gt l Balanced GRY ial Retumed Stack ee ae hee ai i ee a ree ai ENS R E Unbalanced GRY ort E e Supplier Ref Purch Price VAT Gry Saved From Til A i 10914 ABI 011 879 9601 52 A 100 00 A 12 28 True False pi Stock Purchases Entered So Far R 100 00 Amount Needed R 1 00 00 GAY STATUS BALANCED This GRV is now completed At this point BackOffice has now automatically added the stock items to your stock management and updated the cost prices for the purchased items 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 46 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 1 3 Return Stock The Return Stock screen work the same as the Purchase Stock screen in reverse
131. e Client AEC the majority of features in this area of 7 the application will be locked to prevent unwanted changes You may still browse and search through any area of the menu design however only certain details will be available for you to manually alter For more information see the relative topic below e Menu Departmentsh 17 e Menu Categories 1 e Menu Items 119 e Optional Items i34 e Picklistsli37 e Kitchen Printer Wizardh4 e Items Per Report Grouph4 e Items Per Sales Locationli42 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 117 6 6 1 Departments The introduction of Menu Departments adds the option to create custom menu item groups for nvoicing allowing certain menu items to be kept in close proximity to each other for easy access As creating these groups does not involve the editing of menu items this feature is also available to stores that are locked out from editing their menu The other notable functionality of these departments is the ability to select which departments are shown by default on each till ID when starting a new order This is especially helpful if your store has a till pointin key areas of the store such as a bar area and a meals area where certain menu items can only be ordered from special areas ofthe store Departments Adding New Departments Creating a departmentis as simple as clicking on the kismis xi button along the toolbar in order to enter the de
132. e Of Sales Number OF Sales Average Sales Value fii 2005 07 704 LCA R 523 40 ne R 101 03 i 20097 07705 LCA A 4 515 30 46 A 98 16 ay 2009 07 05 alld A 111 80 R 111 80 i 20030706 H04 A 2r 20 2 R 135 60 2009 07706 Mo A 3 61060 4 A 92 94 Performance History p On the Cashier Performance History tab you have the option to check the cashier waiter performance records for a selected date range Setthe range you wish to check by selecting the From date and Until date fields Below that a list of employees in that time period will be displayed summarised on the line graph below that To the right of this graph is the legend showing which colour line applies to which employee 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 184 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 7 3 3 Statistics Selecting the Staff gt Statistics menu option is used to keep active track of all staff meals rung up from nvoicing As seen below Employee Statistics B A 2 x Staff Discounts _ Firsiname Lastname Disc Discs Nett Net Date from 2009 01 01 PE Gontse Eland A 35 42 29 30 A 174 08 54 88 Mmamakoko R 9 90 8 19 R 95 20 26 86 Date until 031 Eoitumelo e until 2009 06 30 o DENNIS KEKANA RTLSB5954 R25 52 8 05 041 Micah Nangambe F 3 60 2 98 A 32 40 10 21 Total Discounts R 120 90 Net sales R 317 20 To specify a date range to check set the Date from and Date until fields on the left hand side Below t
133. e Solutions Activities 55 5 2 Cashup At the end of the trading day you will need to complete the store cashup This process saves all the information entered into the system during trade and comparing that with the information entered by your employees this will give an indication of whether the store is gaining or losing money This process can be done from Aura Invoicing or BackOffice This section outlines the cashup process as done from BackOffice The general cashup procedure is as follows e Employee CashupI56 Only applicable if there are waiters drivers or any employees with time based wages e Till Shift Cashup 5 e Shop Cashupl 63 Colour Legend for Cashup Screen Shift Shop Date 573 1 05 Nov 5730 1 05 Nov Grey background Selected applies to employee till and shop White background Normal applies to employee till and shop Green background Posted applies to employee till and shop 4 05 Nons Purple background Locked applies to till only a Depending on your Microsoft Windows colour setting the selected row may be blue grey or green Look for the WJ selection indicator arrow to the left to see which row is currently selected 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 56 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 2 1 Employee Cashup F BackOffice Cashup _ O Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Cashup mCashup Date __Betresh_ G7 pee 2J 200
134. e Till Drawer and Hisense Type For HiSense till drawers this option must be enabled and the appropriate till drawer model selected from the drop down lost Use Fingerprint for Invoicing or BackOffice If you have a fingerprint scanner installed in this computer you can select this option to bring up a fingerprint scanner prompt instead of the password prompt W Do not this option for BackOffice unless you have verified that a manager or franchisee has a working fingerprint scanned into the Aura system Setting this option without a valid fingerprint will lock you out of BackOffice If this does happen please contact our Aura Help Desk for assistance with temporarily bypassing the fingerprint scanner prompt For more information see our Contact Details 233 Auto Prompt for Barcode Scanner Selecting this option automatically brings up the prompt for the bar code scanner when a new invoice is started Kitchen Item Font Use this option to specify the text display colour of invoices rung up on this computer for Aura Kitchen Items Kitchen Item Background Use this option to specify the background display colour of invoices rung up on this computer for Aura Kitchen Items The above two settings will only make a difference to the invoices as displayed in Aura Kitchen Items If you do not Ww use this application you will not need to change these settings Kitchen Item IP Address Select the network address of the lmages folder in relati
135. e category Once added successfully you should now see the new category in the list as seen below Employee Categories Manager CASHIER Trainee Manager Franchisee Driver EITCHEN CREW Online Orders In this example Trainee Manager w as added Removing an Employee Category If you would like to remove a category click on the category in the list and press the button You should now see a prompt similar to the following SS si i Are you certain you want to remove Category WIR Description Waiter 155E1 799 BB68 4568 BC49 7A32E43F6023 Click on Yes to remove the selected category or click No or Cancel to return to the list W If there are any employees linked to the selected category you will not be able to remove the category A message showing a list of all employees in that category will be shown as seen below Information The following employees are associated with the category OLINE J Either remove the employee from the employee database or associate the employee with another category Orders Online A9306697 5522 4554 AAD3 50D70FF3DE0D Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 103 6 2 2 Employee Records The Employees list is used to maintain a list of your current employees From this screen you may add new employees edit existing employees or remove employees Below is an example ofa list of employees for the purpose of this manual BackOf
136. e following screen F BackOffice Stock Locations _ O x Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Add Edit Stock Locations e ee oe es Description Count Stack Purchase Stack w Stock levels of External stock areas will not affect your normal Gross Profit report in order to see the gross profit for a specific location you will need to run the Gross Profit by Location report For more information see the section on Gross Profit Report Adding New Stock Locations ae ee In order to add a new location click the button from the top toolbar This will present the following window Edit Stock Location ioj x Location Description External men Location Description Use this field to enter a descriptive name for the new category External If so desired you may set an external location This will separate the stock in this location from the stock in the default and other internal locations Any stock transferred to an external location will not be included in the default reports or calculations for the stock W items Also take note that this option is password protected for extra security oe eS ee l T l gt Button Clicking this button will display a hidden feature of the stock locations called Commission This feature is no longer in use and should be removed in the next release of the Aura software 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9
137. e items By doing this you can prevent accidental changes to items that you do not need to update or even use this tool to simply search for records Clicking on the A Dataset Filter button will show the following window Fields Code Code A Field Value Size OT Inv Descr E lee Label Descr 7 Search Type Price E Unit Cost Excl Esact MaC Back Pr f Partial Match at Beginning Type C Partial Match Anywhere Category fkAeportGrouplO I Case Sensitive FES TOCELOCATIONID As Child gt Field Order By Value j By Range j Alphabetic Logical View Summary At first glance you will see that the Code area of this window located in the middle has the same fields as found in the Locating Records feature described just above On the left hand side of the Dataset Filter window is a list of fields instead of the drop down list as found in the Locating Records feature This list can be sorted either alphabetically or logically depending on your preference QO Field Order Alphabetical Sorting This sorting method displays the list of fields in true alphabetical order Logical Sorting This displays the fields in the order in which they are stored in the database directly The first step in setting a dataset filter is to select the field you wish to filter the results by for example all items with certain letters in the code field or certain price field ranges
138. e same data as the Expenses Paid by Supplier report Many of the hourly sales report graphs were showing the incorrect label for different transaction types The Kitchen Management report now displays data correctly when run for only a single day Editing and saving an existing report batch description no longer causes errors For better compatibility the Monthly Beverage Incidence Report now checks for a drinks category by either Beverage or Drinks Dialogs in the scheduler application were not displaying the AM PM indicators on all computers the application now uses a 12 hour time format to fix this A filter problem on the Commission by Menu Item report that caused the commission and total sales figures to show the same value has been fixed The Menu Items with Recipes report was incorrectly rounding the item quantities down to 2 decimal places this has now been increased to 3 Aminor formatting issue on the Average Transaction Size Year on Year report has been fixed The slip version of the Till Cashup Summary no longer shows No Data when it s run before the shop cashup is posted The Sales Summary and Net Sales Summary reports were incorrectly rounding the daily figures to the rand instead of showing the value with cents The Report Scheduler has extra checks in place while saving the next run time which helps to prevent issues with disabled report batches The Sales by Hour by Report Group now shows each transact
139. eady has items no longer causes an access violation Clearing the quantity field while transferring stock no longer shows an error message The active inactive filter in the Customer Survey Questions list has been fixed Switching directly between the Items per Report Group and Items per Sales Location forms now correctly waits for a password prompt Capturing operating exoenses now checks for a valid expense item selection preventing an error caused by trying to save incomplete data After editing a manufactured stock entry BackOffice now updates the master recipe correctly when itis saved BackOffice no longer leaves a blank line after adding a new stock location Attempting to click on certain sidebar shortcuts while refreshing cashup data no longer causes an access violation error Employee attendance records can no longer have a clock out time that is earlier than their clock in time Trying to display store license information multiple times from the Help menu no longer causes an error New Anew plugin is available with support for Serbian Fiscal Printers 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 8 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed The scheduler was not obeying the Exclude Delivery Charges setting for the Royalty Report when run from a schedule The scheduler now allows an hour or minute interval to be set for the relevant sales reports The Daily Expenses report was not showing th
140. eaeicteneae eat esses 176 Tables Sarearen E ea S EN EE a 177 Monitoring 180 Aeus o E S 180 Daily Sales s ssrs ss ttrrertttrrrtetnnnnnnnnnrnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnnneneennnnnnnneeeeennnnnnnne neee 181 Siae Ser a rN E NEE 181 rAd ae f 07 sa PR Se PO Pe PS eee ee ee EA AOE ARRAN 181 PETIORMMANCG sparia aE A Re aa a araa Eaa AA 182 Statistics oaoaraa a a aAa a eaa aaa a Aaa Aaaa raa Aaa aaa Aa Aaaa aaa aa aea a ada aeea iaia 184 Preferences 186 System Settings 111111 1111s 186 Restore Syste m SeRINGS aara a S aa E E ce cdawasvenaee 186 SDE CHIC COMPUTE szerin n a N eae eascvennesaasaceecesetneucennaenaveneeoueie aa 187 Al Computers sonan E a E ENEE AEE E EEE EEE N AEEA ENE E 198 Printers peon a aE aa aA A 211 Accesa Permiesione keto sease cet nc es anton ene tte aceice we vetncnaiawrecusedecutesdecetdanuwenuensccnreneelsteutestaetncaelmentagueceounencs 212 LIST Of ACCESS Permissions sivssscicesensedincccceceeteeesesiecaccicivncvencnccewstdaveece ves sdunedccuomsectasuousvanenveseueceuceucedsstansassvevuekdewtesteteuess 215 Restricted Employee Categories eeeerrcccrrrreeeeessssseeeeecnennneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaneeesesccceqeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnans 219 Kitchen Item Settings ssteteee eee eeeeeeeeenee eee e ee eeeeeecneee eee eeeeeseecnaeeeeeeeeesesescnaeeeeeeeeeseesscneeeeeeeeeeenenas 220 Help 225 Dialup IP Address sssrsesseeseeeeeetee eee e ee eeeeeecneee eee eeeeeeeeccaneeeeeeeeeaseeccne
141. ected employee category Deny all i Grant all l l l l ee This toolbar is used to either allow or disallow the selected access permissions under either the allowed or prohibited activity codes C earch Clear Search l l l l DS The search bar is used to filter the list of displayed activity codes making it simpler to assign access permissions Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 213 Editing Employee Access Permissions To view and edit the permissions for a certain category first select the desired category from the list on the left If you do not have the category here that you are looking for it can easily be added without having to leave the Employee Permissions screen QO To do this right click on an empty space on the left hand side Doing so will display the following options Insert Delete Edit Refresh The above options can also be accessed from the Employee Categories window For more information see the section on Employee Categories ho To either allow or deny any particular activity code first select the permission and use the appropriate function as described in the introduction to this section Below is an example of a selected access permission To 4bandon An Invoice To Access Expense Categories jos To Access Expense Items Ta ett at F omana P sanirniarnte Multiple permissions can also be selected by use of the shift or ctrl control buttons on y
142. ed in a boxif itis to be a take away order the eat in vs eat out recipes setup will be an easy way to account for this 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 128 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 3 2 Other Recipe Uther Coloring Screen Saver Barcode Menu ltem Images g Inactive Report Group Default E Imaging Invoicing I Display ose Se WET Sr am ales Loca ion efault M Don t print We Optional ltem C Prompt for quantity ltem Commission v Percentage VAT Exempt WW Price ls Locked Printers Departments W Production Printer _ Default POS1 POS Select Clear Menu ltem The following are extra options for customizing the selected menu item Inactive If you do not use a certain menu item any longer and are unable to delete it marking the item as inactive will remove the selected item from both nvoicing and from your reports Display With this option selected it will cause the selected menu item to display inside nvoicing With it de selected the item will still be available from a picklist but will not display as an item on it s own in the menu Child Item Selecting Child Item changes the way that the selected menu item prints to the production printer Display and select Child Item This will prevent the item from being available from Invoicing and will highlight the item on the production slip making it clearer on the slip that itis a child of item
143. eeeeeeeeaseescnaeeeseeeeeseesscnaeeeeeeeeeneeeoas 225 Support Information 1 1eecceeeseeeseeeee esse eee eeeecneeee eee eeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeesesescnaeeeeeeeesaesescneeeeeeeeesesessoneeeeeeeens 226 Check For Updates 11111r eeeeeseeeseeeee seen eeeeeeecnnneeeeeeeeeeseecnneeeeeeeeeeasesccneeseeeeesaeesccneeeeeeeeeeeseecnoeeeeeeeens 227 What INS Wy 2 ose tnerni ne Seenrae nanatne nid eeu an E E ERE E E RS 231 Ab uk Wemeaeadoweadeeeencedandocsiswcenduanacdunesqucumcseearanesscwcansuetecdauciaudemuenacanedaewanncuanecquneinudenvetacceunessanenes 231 Contact Details Version 6 3 9 Welcome to Aura BackOffice Welcome to Aura BackOffice 5 Welcome to Aura BackOffice In this modern age restaurant managers and owners have very high expectations of POS systems and not many systems available these days provide all those features at an affordable rate Using computer based systems allow much more flexibility in stock and employee control areas of business that were previously calculated and controlled manually can now be done in a fraction of the time and with much higher accuracy that ever before Aura includes all the basic facilities you would expect to find ina POS system along with many more specialized tools and features designed to streamline not only store management but brand management as well While many of the functions provided may seem very complex to set up and manage at first this is simply due to their flexible nature and with
144. een as seen below Customers Rt Fix Phone Numbers NO eR ao 47 PH IRI Ob A COME IT AC Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 115 6 5 Survey Questions Customer survey questions have been implemented in Aura in order to get the customer s opinion of the service they received in your store The surveyis set up and printed on your invoices as a footer image printing out on the footer of each invoice These same questions must be set up inside Aura BackOffice in order to capture these in the employee cashup screen The capturing of survey questions is described in more detail under the employee cashup screen Areportis also available to view a summary of captured employee surveys For more information see the sections on the Employee Surveys 57 and the Survey Ratings Report When opened the Customer Survey screen will show as follows BackOffice Customer Survey Questions IO x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Customer Survey Questions CORRS GPS SS ap mee ES Ce Description Purchase Stock x Return Stack 2 Set Up Survey Questions To insert a new survey question to the list click on the button from the toolbar this will allow you to enter a unique code and the description for the first question as seen below Code E escription SOT How friendy was your waor m N y Once the code and description have been entered as you want them
145. een implemented yet Order Specify the Sort Order for the selected category this will only affect Aura Invoicing Hidden Category Ticking this option hides the selected category button from the nvoicing selection Q This does not remove items in the category it simply hides the items from view If an employee such as the manager knows the code the item can still be rung up in either Touch Screen or Keyboard mode Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 119 6 6 3 Items The Menu Items screen is used to add remove and maintain all menu items for Invoicing When opening the menu items page you will be presented with the following screen FA BackOffice Menu Item Maintenance Ioj x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Menu Items Navigatio p e re ARE Category Filter aLL Show Active Refresh All M Count Stock Field view Spreadsheet View ltem Gross Protit Cost 30 Margin 70 Purchase Stock Return Stock 2 Menu lte Item Code 20400 Category DRINKS v Sotoder 2 ASFinaj R16 35 Inv Deser 350ML Milkshake HO Code 20371 ASP Exel EEEF Slip Descr Size MILKSHAKE ks Cost Price R 439 Recipe Other Coloring Screen Saver Barcode Recipe for abowe iter Shock tems available for recipes oe Seach ster fall SSC Code Measure Descintion Cost Cates
146. een in the image below Menu Items Per Sales Location Sales Location Current Sales Location Default Search buddy il Excluded tems Included in lt location gt The list on the left hand side of this window is a list of items that are currently included in the selected Sales Location Excluded The list on the right hand side of this window is a list of items that are currently excluded from the selected Sales Location Central Toolbar The vertical toolbar in between the ncluded and Excluded lists contains tools that you will require for including and excluding items from locations Keep in mind that these buttons will work within the search filter This means that using the Include All double arrow to the left or Exclude All double arrow to the right buttons will only move items that are visible after using the search filter 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 146 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 7 Stock The Stock menu contains the features necessary for stock maintenance Just as the stock items are used in recipes for the menu items they are also used in recipes for manufactured stock items Itis essential to ensure that the stock items are set up correctly for these functions to operate accurately W If your store operates independent of a franchise group you will need to use this section to build a stock item list for your brand These stock items will thereafter be used in building a menu syste
147. elected stock item This description will be used to locate and display the stock items in every list of stock items in the Aura system and reports Unit of measure This field identifies the counting method for the selected stock item Ensure that the unit of measure used Is optimal for correct stock calculations this will affect the flow of this stock item through purchases returns recipes and stock takes amongst others W Ifa stock item s unit of measure is changed you will need to ensure that all required recipes stock takes and purchases that use the affected stock item are also updated Be careful when changing the unit of measure as it will take at least one full life cycle of the selected stock item to ensure that all the information linked to the affected stock item is updated correctly A Stock Item Life Cycle is a full circulation of the stock item as described below e This begins with the purchase to update the purchase price per unit of measure e Followed by a stock take to update the stock on hand value e Followed finally by a refresh of the menu items to update the cost of sale vs margin percentages Keep in mind any reports run for the period before the unit of measure was changed will NOT show the updated information as the trading information before the point when everything was updated was calculated using the old unit of measure Controllable This setting will only affect your stock take functions You may
148. election in the left panel of the window From this view two options can be used to add a new schedule you may click the Add button on the tool bar or right click on an empty space in the schedules list and select New Schedule as seen in the example below 03 Batch Schedules Description K New Schedule Enable Schedule Output Type Frinter Enabled V Reports Schedule Printer Settings Activity Report by Activity Code Activity Report by Employee Kitchen Management Active Customers Month on Mon Average Transaction Size Year c Customer Growth Year on Year Top Menu Item Sales Turnover Year on Year Cash Tendered Complete Cashup Report Control Sheet Driver Cashup Detail Erinlawec iach in Batch Name Enter a short but descriptive name here for your schedule for example Weekly Activities Monthly Sales or Month End Reports Description This is an optional field but if there are multiple users maintaining the report schedules you would benefit from briefly describing the purpose of this schedule for the information of other users Output Type Adrop down list allows you to select the desired output format for reports added to this schedule the options for Email PDF and Printer are described in more detail further below Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 87 Selecting Reports to Run Below the initial options pertaining to
149. elivery Areas 164 Adding Streets l ie To setup a street reference with current street names and suburbs click on the button on the toolbar Doing so should present you with a blank line similar to the following pet ower Upper Svectame Suburb Deliver Travel Time True 00 00 In the Street Name and Suburb drop down lists select the desired name and which suburb it is located in Then on the Map Ref drop down list select the map reference that the selected street is found in on your map ee ie l Once all the required information has been entered for this street reference click on the button to save The Deliver and Travel Time fields will automatically update with the information linked to the selected Map Ref as seen below oeer lower upper veottame Subur _ Dolier ravel Tine 0 Some Street Some Suburb True 00 14 Removing Streets If you need to remove a Street for any reason select the street reference in the list and click on the button You will only be able to remove a street reference if there are no customers currently linked to the street If the streets have been setup incorrectly and you need to merge customers from two street references and remove the incorrect reference please use the Street Sweeper For more information see the section on the Street Sweeper 80 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 166 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 10 1 Street Names Clicking on the Stree
150. elpdesk technicians to re run the database update functions from any specified version Command line parameters have also been added for the licensing system these functions are reserved for the helpdesk technicians While switching over to the new reporting system the old reports may still be made available for stores that specifically request it You may now Set your individual business name aka your trading name in the system settings Aura BackOffice now shows a Store Registration prompt if the store is not yet registered with us Anew table has been added to the database for the updated KPI report With the licensing change to online automatic licensing methods have been put in place to lift certain restrictions for stores with no permanent internet connection Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed Afew minor calculation issues on the Royalty Report have been resolved The GRV report would sometimes display an empty space instead of a 0 for certain fields Recent software updates had caused issues with the Calculate Missing Stock Levels calculation this has been updated for the new Aura system Cashup reports will now hide blank pages where no cashup was posted The Item Sales by Hour report has been updated to show the individual line item totals as well as the category and grand totals Ifa report schedule either once off or recurring took more than 5 minutes to run it would be added to the queue more than once
151. en logged and are treated with the importance and urgency each one rightfully deserves please keep the following points in mind when consulting with our helpdesk e Ensure that the technician you are speaking to knows which store you are calling from and that you get the name of the technician you speak to Be clear and concise with what the problem is and when it started appearing The more information you can provide the better If the technician does not offer you a reference number for your call you should ask them for one Not only does this makes it easier to follow up on the status of the issue later but also ensures that your call is logged in our system and is being has been attended to properly Most importantly please keep in mind that CoSoft provide the Aura Point of Sales Suite for any other problems such as your email internet anti virus software and the like please contact the software distributor or supporter related to that application These contact details can generally be found under the application s Help gt About or Help gt Contact Us options Help Manual Author Contact Details If you have any queries or Suggestions regarding the help manual please contact our Midlands Cosoft branch 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 234 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual index A About Aura Screen 231 Access Permissions per Category Activities Menu Overview 36 ADC 65 Add Aura Printers 211 Add i
152. ense as required For more information see the sections on Expense Categories i63 Expense Items i6 or Capturing Expenses 65 6 8 1 Expense Items The Expense Items screen gives you an interface to set up and maintain the available expense items FA BackOffice Expense Items E O x Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Expense Items Navigatio rent AN e AE ae IE Era Category Filter JL Show Active gt Spreadsheet View a ltem Description Expense Code Categor C Vat Inclusive 7 Active Purchase Stock Description Subcategory Vat Exclusive 4 Vat Exempt g Last Payed Supplier Order Quantity A Return Stack Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 Category Filter Select a category to filter the items displayed Show Active Inactive Select whether to filter out the currently active or inactive items Adding New Expense Items To add a new expense payment item click the plus button on the toolbar at the top This will clear all the fields under the tem Description and change the toolbar to display as follows pele ae E Enter all the necessary fields for the new expense item and click on the tick button on the toolbar to save the item See below screen shot for an example ltem Description Expense Lode Exp Category I tiities Wat Inclusive R 0 33 lv Active Description Electricity Subcategory
153. enu item is a part of As mentioned in the Menu Item Departments section a single menu item may be assigned to multiple menu departments without a problem this is done by simply ticking all the desired departments for the current item Seen below is the example ofa list of available departments this list only displays the description field of the departments the code field is used to ensure that the items are linked correctly to the description gt Departments In order to include an item in a specific department simply browse to the menu item using the Navigation Bar 24 and tick the desired department s As seen here Departments W There is no need to tick Default this location will always exist and will always include all menu items You will need to repeat the above process for each menu item to be included in a department Once this is done the next step involves specifying which departments are displayed on each till Keep in mind that this department setting is set on each till individually and will only affect Aura Invoicing For more information see the section on System Settings gt Specific Computer gt Invoice Settings 8 6 6 3 3 Colouring Recipe Other Coloring Screen Saver Barcode Touchscreen Menu Item Colors Brush i Red Font This specifies the button font colour for the selected menu item Brush This specifies the button background colour for the selected menu item
154. er Statistics function a confirmation prompt is displayed first Improved Aproper error message is now shown when attempting to add an expense item using a code that already exists The date selector popup found in screens such as Cashup Stock Take Capture Operating Expenses etc no longer closes prematurely when changing months or years In order to assist Aura technicians with tracking down missing or deleted invoices BackOffice now has an order audit log that saves information about these orders The settings for Kitchen Items on any computer can now be adjusted directly through BackOffice from the server computer New Anew parameter has been included in Aura to simplify the process of updating the database connection string A Support Information page has been added to the Help menu which provides detailed information that can be emailed to our Helpdesk if need be Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed Locking the Windows desktop no longer causes Invoicing to crash Internal stored procedures for the KPI report have been updated to fix compatibility with older SQL Servers An issue that caused the Purchases by Supplier reports to ignore the user selected date range has been resolved An issue with the Gross Profit calculation not using the Trade Until time when calculating the report totals has been resolved Fixed a spelling error in the header of the Purchases by Supplier report A Float Issues fiel
155. ercentage Disable Pay on Delivery Invoices Outstanding orders delivery collect and tables can normally be paid into the till by the operator of a till shift Selecting this option will prevent delivery orders from being paid into the till before the driver assigned to the order has been cashed up Q Selecting this option may help avoid confusion with driver cashups at night by paying all the driver s deliveries into a single till shift For example if a driver has 3 deliveries assigned to him the first two are paid into till shift A and then he is posted into till shift B his amount owed will need to be split accordingly between the two till shifts By preventing cashiers from manually paying a delivery order you can prevent this scenario For more information see the section on the Employee Cashup l 56 Food Preparation Period Enter the maximum time that it takes for an average item to be prepared by the kitchen staff Maximum Delivery Time Enter that maximum time that a driver may take on a delivery Oven Cook Time Enter the time required for cooking a menu item Show Vat Excl on Invoice Optional Selecting the option displays the Vat Excl line on an invoice as well as the vat and total amounts Store Square Feet Optional You may enter the store s size here if you wish Min Order Amount for Delivery If you have a minimum amount required for a customer to qualify for a delivery order enter that mount here I
156. es are in place to try prevent this from occurring Ifa stock item is currently used in a recipe and itis set as inactive a notification will be shown along witha confirmation prompt See the notes covering the Inactive setting in the Stock Items 1541 section for more information on this procedure Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 125 Searching for Recipes If you would like to know how many different recipes a certain stock item is used it First find the stock item in the list of Stock Items Available for Recipes and then press the button If the stock item is not used in any recipes you will see the following message Information x Search COMP Filter ALL Description MOST EG CHICKEN STRIPS A 43 00 ME CL GEM RAND CLEANING GEM R 38 60 CL CLOW EACH CLOTHS R 36 41 CL MOOS E G COCKTAIL SAU A 31 29 ME MOT BOs COMPUTER PA R000 ST mini kit Cook D 2972 On ro If the item is found in one or more recipes a list of all menu items using that stock item will be displayed Similar to the following Menu Item Recipes That Use Stock No PO17 TA Search Characters _ i ITEMDESC SIZE a 1L COKE 1 Litre a APPLETIZER CAN BONAGUA APPLE amp MINT 500ML BONAGUA LEMON LITE 500ML BONAQUA LITCHI 500ML BONAGUA NAARTJIE 500ML BONAGUA SPARKLING 500ML BONAGQUA STILL 500ML BONAGUA STRAWBERRY 500ML BUDDY COKE 500ML BUDDY COKE LIGHT 500ML BUDDY COKE ZERO 500ML BUDDY
157. es can be applied to any type of invoice although access to apply these discounts codes is controlled by settings in the Access Permission and the Employee Record settings as described in each section respectively For more information see the sections on Access Permissions and Employee Settings ho BackOffice Discount Codes O x Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Discount Codes a ee ee E a i Filter Active Priority Time Based Purchase Stack Return Stack Manufacture Monitoring z Retail License License Renewal Date 27 June 2010 Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 E Click this button to force a refresh of the over ring reasons list Filter This drop down list will filter the list of discount codes to show either active or inactive discount codes Discount Codes List The list below will display a list of the discount codes as per the Filter above Descriptions can be found below Existing Discount Codes If any discounts raready exist in the system you will see the layout of the discount as in the following example a two get me Freel A 0 00 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 171 Adding a New Discount Code To add a new discount click on the button from the toolbar This will display the following window allowing you to enter the desired settings for the discount Ret D
158. escription Discount Amt F 0 00 Fixed Override Youcher ls Percent Staff Meal 7 Late Delivers Active Status Open Auto Apply D Wutermoast Pang Pricrity fi Time Specific OK Cancel Ref This field is used for a reference code for this discount this must be unique to this discount and cannot be used more than once Description Enter a full description for the discount code This description will print on the customer s invoice slip Discount Amt Enter the amount that this discount will work with Discounts can be set to either take off an amount or override the order to a certain amount Fixed If you would like nvoicing to apply the discount with the exact amount that is entered above tick this option If this option is de selected nvoicing will prompt for the discount amount percentage when the discount is applied Override With this option selected applying this discount will override the order to the amount selected With this option de selected it will take the abovementioned amount off the current order Voucher This option is used for statistical marketing report purposes only Is Percent Selecting this option will change the discount amount from a fixed rand value to a percentage of the order that the discountis being applied to Ww When deciding if the discount is going to be a value or a percentage discount keep the following points in mind Percentage inv
159. et select this option This option ensures the labels are printed in the correct order 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 192 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 2 3 Printer Setup Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Available Aura Printers Invoice Printers Production Printers Creditcard Printers Kitchen Credit Card Device ipt2 M Direct To Port Copies i Report M Print line value on kitchen slip M Printtotals on kitchen slip The Printer Setup tab is used to specify the settings for your invoice kitchen and credit card printers Before selecting the devices port or drivers you will need to set up the printer s category and type inside the Printers tab For more information on adding printers to the Available Aura Printers see the section on the Printers Tabl21P In order to activate a printer select the printer on the right under Available Aura Printers and press the arrow pointing to the left to move the printer to it s relative category Using the following button panel lt lt Moves all printers left into their respective categories lt Moves the selected printer into it s selected category gt Moves the selected printer to the right out of it s category effectively disabling the printer gt gt Moves ALL printers out of their respective categories effectively disabling ALL printers On
160. eted Log File Resized Completed Dump Log File Purging ACTIVITY W VERY IMPORTANT Do not press any keys run any other applications or attempt to close this window at any stage during the purge process Doing so will cause corruption in your database and possibly cause you to lose important data Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 79 Completing Database Purge Once the process is completed you will be presented with the following screen Database Purge ver 1 1 0 0 Delete data prior to 2006 01 31 W After running the Database Purge you MUST run a Database Optimise If you do not run the optimise after the purge the physical database size will not be altered If we compare this process to using spreadsheets Database Purge is equal to clearing a row of information while Database Optimise is equal to saving your spreadsheet file 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 80 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 10 4 Street Sweeper The Street Sweeper application is part of the database maintenance software This application is used to remove duplicate street entries in your customer list When this application is run you will be presented with the following screen As the Street Sweeper application changes information in your database directly for safety reasons the application will not continue unless a backup is performed first
161. f access permissions may now be filtered to simplify searching for a specific permission In between the list of allowed and prohibited activities you will see the Search area as seen here Deny all B Grant all g Search Clear Search Simply begin typing a keyword that you would like to search for in the Search block you will notice the list of both allowed and prohibited activities will be filtered as you type As the list is filtered the background will change from white to yellow indicating the listis filtered The filter is applied as a partial match anywhere filter which means if you search for the word menu the filter will show all items with the word menu anywhere in the description As seen in the following example the list of permissions for Cashier has been filtered using the keyword till Deny all nd Grant all g Search til Clear Search Prohibited Actwities for Cashier 5 matching till The Deny All and Grant All buttons now take this filter into account as well affecting only the permissions shown in the filter For example if we press the Grant All button while the filter is set as in the image seen above only the items displayed will be added to the list of allowed activities any other permissions that are not shown will not be included To clear the Search block either press the BackSpace key a few times or press the Esc key once Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software
162. f the option to check for outstanding orders when locking the till shiftis not ticked then Invoicing will not check for outstanding orders before ending and posting the final shift When attempting to posta till shift with orders still outstanding you will see a prompt similar to the following Aura Backoffice Cannot lock the till The tills can only be locked after ALL invoices are paid in To be able to lock the tills you need to determine why these invoices have not been paid into the till or assigned to an employee who is then cashed up 26 Nov 11 1140101 Delivery Employee EMP Customer BREDLY 1140152 Delivery Employee EMP Customer CARMELA Cosoft Software Support 086 100 AURA 2672 J Close Print In cases like this the outstanding orders must be completed before Aura will allow the cashup to continue wD If you see during the cashup that there are outstanding orders from previous days and you are unsure of how to resolve the issue please contact the Aura Help Desk for assistance Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 63 5 2 3 Shop Cashup 5 x Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Cashup Cashup Dae Refresh 22 Jun 2004 Count Stock gu Till Shop a 180 2 Jun 2009 233 30 R 0 00 R 0 00 R 0 00 A O00 A 500 00 FA 0 00 A 0 00 F 0 00 te Purchase Stack Retur Stack 4 Till Totals OverRings FA O 00 Gross
163. ff making a double order if a cup of coffee is added toa table order and printed out again Group Items On Invoice Will group items indented below their parent items on table orders For instance a breakfast with a choice of eggs and sausages etc will have the options printed below the parent item and indented for clarification Prompt To Print On Payment If your computer is set to reprint an invoice for a delivery collect table order on paying Then by ticking this option a prompt will be displayed for printing the customer s slip again as opposed to it printing automatically Print Assigned Invoices On Payment By ticking this option once a delivery collect table order is paid into till a duplicate Slip will be printed to the invoice printer If you de select this option nothing further will be printed upon paying the order W The option for Prompt To Print On Payment is dependant on the option for Print Assigned Invoices On Payment for the prompt to be displayed both these options must be ticked Print On Assigning Driver With this option selected the invoice slip will print out again with the new details when a driver is assigned This option will option will only have an effect on a computer with an invoice printer set up Allow Reprint With this option selected Aura Invoicing will allow you to re print any order s customer and production slip from the current day s trading Keep in mind that Duplicate Copy will
164. fice Employee Maintenance iol x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Employees Hot e Bo l ra Show Active Count Stock on Purchase Stack Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 Show top right hand corner Select to display either active or inactive employees Employee List Displays a list of employees currently in the system along with any details assigned to each employee Certain employees even though having access to BackOffice should not have rights to edit employee records ofa higher level of staff For example a manager should not be able to maintain or create a franchisee employee record Allowing a manager to do so would create serious security issues in your store that will prove to be very difficult to trace For more information on preventing this see the section on Restricted Employee Categories 219 For more information see the relative topic below e Adding New Employees 04 e Editing Employee Records 103 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 104 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 2 2 1 Adding New Employees ae l To add a new employee from the toolbar click on the button This will start the Insert New Employee wizard as seen below Employee Details Enter personale details for the employee Employee First Hame Telephone Last Hame Alt Telephone
165. formation see the section on Navigating Records 24 Stock Item List This will display a list of all items that have been transferred on the selected date Selecting Transfer Locations To transfer stock first select the locations to transfer to and from Select each location from the drop down list As seen below From location efault To location Another Shope From location Defaull To location 4nother Shop Cold Room Default Dry Storage Another Shop Cold Room Fstermal Storie Select FROM Location From 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Dry Storage Select TO Location Version 6 3 9 54 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Selecting Items to Transfer To transfer stock click the button from the Toolbar This will bring up the Stock item Selector screen For more information see the section on the Stock Item Selector 37 In order to transfer a stock item from location Ato location B the same stock item must be allowed to exist in both YU locations Amongst other reasons this prevents stock accidentally going into the incorrect location If you have just created a new location you may see the following message Information e There are no stock codes that exist in both stock locations DD In this case you will first need to go specify which stock items are available in the new location For more information see the section on Stock Items Per Location 15 Once you ha
166. from a certain date and not immediately you may specify a future date here to Start the report batch schedule Along side this you may specify an end date as well or leave the latter option on No end date to have this schedule run indefinitely You may come back and edit this setting later if you need to do so 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 92 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Report Output Destinations The next step in the schedule setup process is to select the desired destination for your report batch each of these three options are designed with certain scenarios in mind but you may select whichever option is most appropriate for your store PDF Seen here is an example of the Adobe PDF settings Reports Schedule PDF Settings PDF Settin Output Path EN Output Path Click the button on the right hand side to navigate for the desired output folder for this report batch sa Do not select a network location for the output you may experience undesirable results from that setup If you need P to output to a network location first map a network drive on the local machine and then select that new drive letter here L Printer Seen here is an example of the printer settings Reports Schedule Printer settings PDF Settings ev hit apps4 RICOH Aficio MP C2050 RPCS Black isv hit apps4 RICOH Aficio MP C2050 RPCS Black k
167. g at hh mm ss Using this second option allows you to set the batch to run every certain number of minutes or hours for a select period of the day For example you could set the batch to run every hour from 9 00am to 10 00pm while the store is trading while not running any earlier than 9 00am or later than 10 00pm Duration Start Date yyyy mm dd End date yyyy nm dd and No end date If the schedule you are setting up is only needed from a certain date and not immediately you may specify a future date here to Start the report batch schedule Along side this you may specify an end date as well or leave the latter option on No end date to have this schedule run indefinitely You may come back and edit this setting later if you need to do so Weekly Seen here is an example of the default Weekly recurrence schedule Daily Frequency MEER a Hour s Starting a 12 00 00 AM i a a ee Explanation of settings Frequency Recurs every x week s on lt week day selection gt These settings allow you to specify the number of weeks between running the report batch along with which days of the week the schedule should run For example you may specify that the schedule is run every week on Mondays Wednesdays and Fridays or that itis run every second week on Mondays only Daily Frequency select one of the two options 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 90 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Occurs o
168. g list of details pertaining to the error as a result the error logs are very large Keep this in mind before pasting the log in something such as an instant message or online support chat session Generally speaking you would only need to use this option if explicitly requested to do so by an Aura Helpdesk technician Email Support This option will email your error log to the Aura Helpdesk This information will allow our developers to instantly see what caused the error enabling them to more easily find a solution for the error Internet Support This option will open your default internet browser and attempt to create a new Live Support chat which will allow you to get assistance from an Aura Helpdesk technician W The last two options listed here require an active internet connection to function If you are currently experiencing problems with your internet connection please leave the error message on screen and call our Aura Helpdesk on the number provided 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 34 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 4 2 Possible Startup Messages Note to self Build section here with list of messages that may come up at startup what they mean and how auser should respond to them Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 36 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 Activities The Activities menu contains the main interactive features of BackOffice options found here will be used o
169. ged to Recurring this will in turn provide various options relating to the recurring batch After selecting the Recurring schedule type the next step is to select how frequently this report batch must be run Three options are available here e Daily This option will provide settings to run the report batch every x number of days at a time of your choosing e Weekly This option will provide settings to run the report batch on select days of every x number of weeks as you choose e Monthly This option will provide settings to run the report batch on a specific day every x number of months as you see fit Daily Seen here is an example of the default Daily recurrence schedule Recurs Every p dan Daily Frequency Occursonceat 12 00 00aM O O arm 12 00 00 AM Duration Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 89 Explanation of settings Frequency Recurs every x day s Setting this option will specify how many days there are between running the schedule for example making the report batch run every day set to 1 or every three days set to 3 Daily Frequency select one of the two options Occurs once at hh imm ss Using this first option will run once on each day at the specified time only after having run for one day the next run will be on the next recurring day Occurs every x hours minutes Starting at hh mm ss and Endin
170. h the list of excluded stock items on the right and look for the items that need to be included in this location Select the first item and click on the E button This will include only the currently selected stock item If the stock location is not only for certain types of stock but rather as a bulk storage room you may also include all stock items This is done by pressing the If you wish to remove a stock item from the currently selected location select the item on the left hand side and press the gt E button This will move only the selected stock item on the left out of the current location bh To remove all items from the current location and start over use the gt button W Any changes made here are automatically saved there is no undo function for editing stock item locations Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 161 6 8 Expenses The Expenses tracking feature of Aura may be used to maintain a log of payments made from the store for non sales related items This maybe anything from staff transport arrangements utility accounts or even repairs and maintenance to in store facilities tables and chairs for example Before an expense may be captured correctly in Aura first a category must be in place for the expense and then an expense item for that particular type of expense will need to be added Once these requirements have been met you may capture the exp
171. hat you will see the totals relating to the staff discounts only While to the right of that appears a list of all employees that had staff meals during the selected period Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 186 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 Preferences The Preferences menu contains features relating to the maintenance of your Aura installation If these are set up correctly you will not need to access any of these options in a normal trading day See a topic below for more information e System Settings i8 e Access Permissions 213 e Restricted Employee Categories 219 e Kitchen Item Settings 220 8 1 System Settings The System Settings window contains all the settings relating to the running of your installation of Aura Aside from physical hardware configuration such as printer type and location of printers these settings also change the behaviour of the product W These settings are vital to the correct operation of your Aura system do not change settings unless you are certain you understand the setting s meaning or unless instructed to do so by an Aura Help Desk Support Technician For more information see the relative section below e Specific Computer MaA e All Computers h9 e Printersl21 8 1 1 Restore System Settings During an Aura program upgrade there are many components of the program and the database that need to be adjusted in order for the new version to function corre
172. have an option to separate entries with the same code but a different price Ifno parameters are required to run a report the parameters screen will be skipped after successful user authentication New New report Previous Stock Takes New report Average Transaction Size Year on Year New report Customer Growth Year on Year New report Turnover Year on Year Invoicing Fixed The Special Orders feature for manually capturing failed online orders now has a toolbar button as well Individual line item VAT rates correctly reflect the global VAT rate as set in the global settings When processing a new order automatically opening the menu in a specific department no longer causes an error message Invoicing now checks the server for a valid Aura license instead of trying to connect to the internet directly Improved An unnecessary additional prompt when capturing a special order has been removed Other Aura Applications Driver Station Fixed The order printed on assigning a driver no longer prints Duplicate Copy on the customer slip Contact Manager Improved Updating customer statistics now runs one update for all applicable customers instead of one update per customer 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 18 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Aura 6 3 Changes BackOffice Fixed Due to changes with the reporting system the GRV report as run from the Stock Purchases feature was not run
173. he same as if it was rung up on It s own Override Price This will give you an option to select a price to override the charge to The option below the drop down list currently show 1 in the above screen shot will only be available with Override Price selected Use this field to enter the desired price for each item in the selected picklist Selecting Size Filter If you include a category instead of individual menu items you can narrow the available options further by specifying a size as well This will only work if the menu items in a selected category have sizes assigned to them Picklist Item selection Size The size setting will only affect the category currently selected inside the picklist For more information see the W section on Menu Item Sizes h2 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 139 Assigning a picklist to a menu item Firstly you will need a menu item to assign the picklist to Select the desired menu item from the list on the right hand side and click and drag that item to the lefthand side Release the mouse button when the cursor is over Menu Items With Picklists as seen below ltems with Picklists Picklists Menu tems Categories Menu Items with Picklists Example Picklist Categories with Pi AGUA MONTE STILL WATER DAMS Search bonaqua afd By Code AQUA MONTE SPARKLING WATER DA ssc Er Lrg Piz TIKKA CHICKEN Pl 149 pee VCROTADIAK OFFA Once the item is ad
174. he top of the window Selecting an invoice will display the contents of that invoice in the Order Detail section below that Once you have found the invoice you are looking for you may re print the order by pressing the Print button Once you are done with the Order History window click on Close button In order to print the invoice you will need to have an invoice printer set up on your server computer If your server computer does not have an invoice printer currently installed you may also print to one of your till computer s invoice printers For more information see the section on the Invoice Printer Settings 193 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 101 6 2 Employees The Employees menu contains the options specific to adding and maintaining your store employee s records and categories Including specific employee wages and staff meal discount restrictions Each employee record must have the correct category assigned to it this is done for security reasons For more details on these security measures see the section on Employee Access Permissions 214 For more information view the relative topic below e Employee Categoriesho e Employee Records 102 6 2 1 Employee Categories The Employee Categories list displays a list of your currently available employee categories Employee categories are used to differentiate between different groups of employees for multiple reasons including employee
175. hen Printer Wizardh4 In addition to assigning menu items to production printers one item ata time all items in a category can be assigned to a production printer at once To access this and other functions you will need to right click on the desired production printer Doing so will display the following menu Printers Productiqn Printar Assign to all items Assign to a category Clear all items Clear all items in a category Assign to all items This will assign ALL items in your menu to print to this production printer regardless of their category Assign to a category This will bring up a menu category selection window similar to the one seen below Menu Categories Description Std i 2 3 4 z E T E z ee a H Ww Poe wo 13 Select Close Clear all items Selecting this option will clear ALL items from this printer thus setting no items to print to this production printer until they are reassigned Clear all items in a category This option will show the same window as Assign to all items in a category but selecting a category will then stop all items in the selected category from printing to the selected production printer 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 132 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Menu Item Departments In the lower right corner of this tab you will see a Departments selection block this selection block allows you to specify which department a particular m
176. here are the access permissions currently found in the Aura POS system due to the simple nature and sheer volume of reports included in Aura access permissions directly relating to the running of reports have been excluded from this list When looking through the access permissions in Aura BackOffice reports related permissions will be seen in a format such as To Run lt name gt Report For example To Run Gross Profit Report To Run Stock Variance Report etc These report permissions should for the most part be granted to the manager category Access Permission To Abandon An Invoice To Access Expense Categories To Access Expense Items To Access Expense Payments To Access Menu Items To Access Stock Items To Access The Menu Item Selector To Activate Or Disable Plugins To Add An Expense Payment To Add New Menu Items To Adjust Invoice Line Quantity To Alter Menu Item Descriptions To Assign Driver To Assign Item To External Stock Location To Authorise a Transaction Refund To Authorise Any Staff Meal To Authorise Discounts To Authorise Own Staff Meal To Browse Old Invoices To Browse Shop Cashup Data To Browse Stock Takes To Browse Waiter cashup data To Cashup a Waiter To Change Assigned Table To Change Invoice Allocation Between Waiters To Change Login Details For An Employee Access Level Manager Admin Admin Manager Manager Manager Cashier Admin Manager Admin Cashier Admin Driver Cashie
177. his message will print out at the top of the customer slip just below your business name logo Force password change every lo day s Deliv Driver Message This message will print on the customer slip for delivery orders only Invoicing will automatically replace 1 with the driver name and will replace 2 with the driver s deliveries count Min Value for Alt Image This is an old setting and is no longer used Round to Price rounding is the most widely accepted method for simplifying the exchange of cash and change for a customer The rounding steps are set here as a unit value meaning one unit of your country s standard currency Customer Notes This is an old setting and is no longer in use Auto Restart Transaction Select this option to start a new transaction as soon as one is completed Use Alternate Slip Header If there are two till slip header images set up on the server computer selecting this will make Invoicing use the secondary header instead of the normal header Enable Separate Invoicing Password Used mainly for managers Allows an employee to have two separate passwords one for general use and a second for Invoicing only For more information on setting this password see the section on Adding New Employees h o Save Credit Card Info When selected processing a credit card payment will show a credit card information screen to enter information such as credit card holder name CRC numbers expiry
178. how a list of currently active till shifts to post the employee into This will only list till shifts that have not yet been ended or posted x Shift Date THN ID 514 22 Jun 2009 Select the appropriate till shift and click OK If the employee is still clocked in you will see the clock out prompt click on OK to complete the process Once the employee has clocked out the system will show the following message CT x i Employee has been cashed up successfully Once OK is pressed Aura will refresh the screen and show the posted employees with a green background colour as seen here Empit Full Mame Clock In Time g 5 y stem Ad ded E p 20 F 37 0 B Hee F B at 45 A F CAS System Cashier 2009 06 22 05 43 45 4M 2003 06 22 03 14 57 PM Repeat this process until all necessary employees have been cashed up into their respective till shifts Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 59 5 2 2 Till Shift Cashup BackOffice Cashup 10 x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Cashup Cashup Date Refresh 22 Jun 2004 Employee Till Shop Shit Shon Date TiD Cese Date Op _On2 Jon JOnt Ops Jove Jonbas ottime o GAve Jow Foa oa J 51 E mL 1 22 Jun 2009 001 Count Stock Purchase Stack Return Stack Till Totals OverRings A O00 Gross Sales Ex O A A 2617 40 Manufacture Less Discounts A 608 90 Stock ADD Delve
179. ial Orders Contirmation Amounts eee Nes Customers 60 Other Customers 120 General Form Look Normal Touch Screen In a new invoice Normal will require cashiers to ring up menu items with typing in the code Touch Screen will show the menu as buttons General Use Special Orders Opening Form Main GUN Main will open Invoicing into the normal screen with the two tool bars along the top and the invoices listed below GUI will open by default to the Table Floor Plan click here for more information on setting up the floor plan Default Transaction Type Counter Collect Table Delivery From the drop down list select the transaction type that your cashier s will use most often as the default This can still be changed from inside the order if need be Float This float amount will be automatically inserted into this till shift This figure can still be adjusted in the cashup screen Payment Screen Delay Select the number of seconds that the customer payment screen shows for before closing my Do not set this delay to 0 seconds It is known to cause problems with opening the till drawer automatically e Persist User When selected this will force Invoicing to take the first password entered and for that invoicing program session and will automatically insert that same password at every password prompt Invoicing will continue to assume that the first employee is working at this computer until either Invo
180. icing is closed or until Secure Till is clicked Convert Delivery to Collect if Address Fails While this option is enabled delivery orders will be converted to collect orders if there is a problem with the linked customer s delivery address While disabled Invoicing will simply show a warning about the address but will not automatically change the transaction type Prompt for Name on Counter Orders By selecting this option Invoicing will prompt for the customer details on counter orders as itdoes for collect and delivery orders Warn If Duplicate Customer Exists When trying to add a customer from this computer Invoicing will automatically search and see if there are any other customers with the same name surname or phone number Prompt for Transaction Type By selecting this option Invoicing will display a prompt to select the type of transaction to process Take note of the default transaction type found to the left of this setting as the currently selected default transaction type will be highlighted in the transaction type prompt Prompt for Eat In Take away Enabling this option will prompt the cashier processing an order to select whether the customer will be eating at the store or taking the order away with them In order for this option to be set the eat in take away feature must be enabled For more information on enabling this option see the All Computers gt Program Settings gt Generall204 section Use Ta
181. ill Select Till Till 1D 20 Settings Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Selected Till Computer Name and Till ID This shows the name and Aura till ID for which the currently visible Specific Computer settings apply to Copy Till Settings This option allows you to copy all Specific Computer settings from another till ID to the currently selected till ID This Till Shortcut button to return to the settings for the current till ID Select Till Opens a list of all till IDs registered in your system allowing you to edit the Specific Computer settings for another computer remotely For more information see the relative section below Invoicing Settingsl38 e Printer Settings ho e Printer Setup 19 e Touch Screen 195 e Devicesho e Reportsho Credit Cardli9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 188 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 2 1 Invoicing Settings Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Noma Ss Persist User Form Look arma W Convert delivery to counter if address fails Onenina Form Main l Prompt for Name for Counter Orders iii W Warn if duplicate customer exists Default Transaction Type Counter l Prompt For Transaction Type Float 500 Prompt For Eat In Take away Payment Screen Delay 5 Use Table Numbers aes eA A 1 0 al Grid Size Modifier Conhgure Spec
182. ily by checking the Computer Name and Till ID fields at the very top of this same window Remember Last Selected Department If a till will be used for one specific department more than any others you may find it useful to load the required department directly when a new invoice is started If required a cashier can still select items from other departments this simply causes Invoicing to show a specific VU department by default when starting a new order For more information on setting up Departments see the sections on Menu Item Departments 1A or Assigning Items to Departments 132 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 190 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 2 2 Printer Settings Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card gt General Only print new items Print waiter details on slip Group Items On Invoice Print gratuity line Prompt To Print On Payment Print Customer Survey Print Assianed Invoices On Payment z Print On Assigning Driver apor type en M Allow Reprint Copies 1 l Print Store Address on Invoice Print Company Name on Invoice Pause Between Copies USB COM Sim W Print Office Code i Print Invoice Logos General Only Print New Items Relies on Enable Editing of Invoices 203 With this ticked after an invoice has been modified only the new items will print out again This can be used to avoid the kitchen sta
183. inger are both clean before scanning the fingerprint Any dirt or grease on either one will have an adverse effect on the fingerprint scanning process In order to save a fingerprint the employee record must first be saved Each employee will require a password whether or not fingerprints are used In order for the fingerprint system to work effectively you will require a fingerprint scanner to be installed and activated on each of your POS computers When using this feature you will see one of the messages as described below see the relative message for more information on what is happening Awating tingerorint QO If the fingerprint being scanned matched another user s profile you will see the following message r CT e This fingerprint is already in use by an employee la Please scan another finger At this point ensure that the employee in question does not already have another account in Aura The selected employee must now press their finger on the fingerprint scanner to continue You will see one of the following prompts If there is no saved fingerprint for the employee in question you will be presented with the following message Click on OK and scan the fingerprint 3 more times Register x Touch the same finger four times for registration k If the user s fingerprint has already been saved correctly
184. inter Setup Print Office Code This code is printed out on each and every invoice by default It contains system information about the order in the following structure lt order number gt lt cashier first name gt lt total order amount gt De selecting this option will stop this code from being printed on invoices from this computer Print Invoice Logos This option affects the invoice slip header that is printed out on each invoice if this option is de selected the invoice slips printed from this specific computer will not print the header image Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 191 Other Printers These options are displayed at the bottom of the Printer Settings tab below the options described above lie Printers Report LPT Label Label Margin 0 6 M Side by side Report Select your A4 reports printer from a drop down list This option is only required on the server computer for Aura Back Office Label Select your label printer from a drop down list This option is only needed in the computer that has the label printer installed on it such as the kitchen computer Label Margin Set the margin size of the labels that are being printed this margin is the distance from the edge of the sheet up to the edge of the label itself Side by side If the roll of labels being used have all labels in one column leave this option de selected If there are two columns of labels on the she
185. ion Use fixed stock cost C Use FIFO for stock costing Royalty Report Includes Include Specified Stock Item in the Report Stock ltem Code General Report Settings Use Trading Day for Royalty Report Selecting this option will cause the Royalty Report to separate the trading day by the Trade Until time instead of the computer date Use Stocktake Times in Stock Variance GP Reports This allows the Aura system to calculate the stock variances and stock on hand calculations more accurately Calculate GP an Inverse of FC Due to currency rounding the GP report percentages may not always add up to precisely 100 this option will prevent that scenario Show Vat Excl amounts in Sales Reports Selecting this option will include a VAT excluded figure in the sales reports as well For more information see the section on the Sales Reports Exclude Delivery Charges from Royalty Report The delivery charge is legally considered a form of income to the store and therefore will be included in the royalty report If for some reason you do not wish to include this figure in the royalty select this option For more information see the section on Royalty Report Automatically Calculate Manufactured Stock This setting is linked to the stock item s Auto Manufacture feature the reports will only display the automatically manufactured items correctly if this option is ticked For more information see the section on Auto Manufacture S
186. ion type s average sales correctly A hidden line that was incorrectly made visible when exporting the Stock Return Detail or Late Delivery Summary reports to PDF format have been fixed While grouping by employee the Activity Report now uses the employee name and employee number for grouping preventing employees with the same names from being shown together Changes have been made to the FIFO stock cost calculation to ensure the closing stock for one day correctly matches the opening for the next day An issue with passing runtime parameters to the sub reports has been fixed after recent localisation changes to the report viewer The unit cost values on the Menu Item with Recipes report now correctly match the sum of it s recipe items In some stores the Shop Cashup Summary report was ignoring the user selected report date range Aproblem where a specific combination of data filters would incorrectly cause active stock items with no opening stock closing stock or theoretical stock usage to be excluded from the report The Kitchen Management report no longer adds a blank page to the end of the report The Report Scheduler Run Now function no longer causes memory leaks A data filter on the Stock Profile report no longer causes stock items to be duplicated Apotential problem with the report scheduler incorrectly running a newly added monthly schedule multiple times has been fixed Saving newly created report batches without specifying
187. is you may now add Garnish to the menu item recipe as opposed to each of the four items in the garnish Aura Invoicing will automatically fetch the preset stock amounts from each item in the garnish when a meal is processed that requires it Wastage Displays the average percentage of the stock item that is lost during the preparation of the selected stock item This will be the difference between the Prepped and Unprepped values shown in the stock takes W The wastage percentage can be calculated by taking a certain quantity of the item before itis prepared for use and comparing that to the quantity that remains after is has been prepared If you purchase cheese in bulk unit of measure KG and then itis grated in store The grating process is referred to as the stock preparation process While being grated small amounts of the cheese will fall away and be wasted If 5kgs of bulk cheese is prepared and you come out with 4 75kgs of grated cheese this gives a wastage percentage of 5 Bulk Cost Displays the cost per unit of measure before itis prepared This field is automatically updated from the purchase or manufacture cost of the item Prepped Cost Displays the cost per unit of measure after preparation If there is no wastage percentage set for an item for example with cans or bottles this figure will be the same as the Bulk Cost a Ifthe Bulk Cost or Prepped Cost is incorrect and you are unable to edit the value the
188. is where information would be updated if menu prices need to be updated or employee details captured when a new waiter is hired or stock purchases entered into the system Let s begin with starting the system a standard installation will place shortcuts in two locations the Start Menu and the Desktop You may either of these two methods to open BackOffice Shortcut in Start Menu gt Programs or All Programs gt Aura gt BackOffice Aura Mail Manager AAW Aura Report Scheduler lg 3 5p a BackOffice i B BackOffice Manual n B Customer Countdown a t cH Invoicing p BY Invoicing Manual d o Prep Monitoring y ee we ai ie emn Shortcut on desktop val BackOffice When Aura BackOffice is opened a user password Is required to access the system This is done for security reasons and each activity performed in the Aura suite is recorded along side your user name for reference If this is the first time running BackOffice enter the password 001 atthe following password prompt Controlled Access A passion is needed To Run Backoffice With a new installation of Aura only one user account is available Added by System is available with the following details First name Added by Last name System Employee Number 001 Password 001 There are various access points in the Aura suite that are password protected While setting up the system until unique passwords have been added for all employees
189. isappears from the list on WJ the right Now select the incorrect street name from the list on the right hand side as below i Street Mover ver 1 0 0 6 Corect version of street lncorect version s to be replaced w BLACKEN LEE GLEN VISTA _ BLACKEM LEE And click on the Fix button atthe bottom This will now bring up the following prompt Do you really want to remove the un inked streets If you are certain that you have selected the street names correctly click on Yes Replacing Incorrect Streets This has now re assigned all information that was linking to Blacken Lee and moved it to Blacken Lee Glen Vista To confirm this check the list again to ensure that the incorrect street is in fact removed a Street Mover ver 1 0 0 6 Corect version of street lncorect versionjs to be replaced BHUSH BUCK MEVERSDAL BHUSH BUCK MEVYERSDAL _ BLACKEM LEE GLEN VISTA BLACKEN LEE GLEN ISTA Repeat this process for each incorrect street name you may find in your customer s list When you have successfully replaced all incorrect streets click the close button to exit the Street Sweeper After working with the Street Sweeper it is recommended that you update the customer statistics For more WV information see the section on Updating Customer Statistics 97 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 82 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 10 5 Report Scheduler The Report Scheduler
190. it down order These options are set regardless of the order type as they only affect the items added to the standard recipe Controls for the eat in and eat out recipes are handled exactly the same way as the standard recipe however the difference comes in with the way these recipes affect your menu items In order to use this feature the Eat in Eat out option needs to be enabled in your system settings For more X information see the section on General Program Settings 202 When this option is enabled you will see two extra tabs next to the standard Recipe tab as shown in the example image below Standard Recipes 123 This section simply covers the purpose of the extra recipe options O Example Eat In Eat Out Recipe Variations Base Recipe Eat In Recipe Eat Out Recipe This will contain your standard 4xpaper plates 1 xpizza box large pizza recipe with the base and toppings Without any packaging or napkins 4xbranded paper napkins 8 xbranded paper napkins End Result End Result Adding this item to an order order as Adding this item to an order marked an Eat In option will take the base as Eat Out will not add any paper recipe and add 4 paper plates and4 plates but will instead add a pizza box branded paper napkins without any and extra napkins box Not all menu items will require variations for the eat in or eat out options however in scenarios like the example above where a pizza is only plac
191. item begin by pressing the button on the Manufactured Items toolbar at the top of the screen This will bring up the Stock Item Selector window filtered to only show items that are available for manufacture For more information see the section on the Stock Item Selector 37 Select the item to enter from the list and click on OK This should bring you to the following screen Manufacture Stock Manufactured Item Details Location Default Stock Cheese Mix a CHOD Batch Oty i Use Master Recipe D Batch Yield fi Measure KG In this example we will use a cheese mix with half cheddar and half mozzarella Location Displays the location of the selected manufacture stock item Stock Displays the selected manufacture stock item along with the code to the right hand side WJ If the incorrect item has been selected click the l button to return to the Stock Item Selector screen Batch Qty Select the number of times the recipe will be repeated in this session Use Master Recipe Select this option if you will be using the preset recipe deselect it if you will add the recipe manually for this session Batch Yield lf Use Master Recipe is ticked this field will display the quantity that one batch of the master recipe will yield lf Use Master Recipe is not ticked you may enter the quantity that you produced from the recipe used be careful with this option by doing so you will have to accurately reco
192. ith the page on all printers Aura 6 3 2 Changes BackOffice Improved From this version only BackOffice has access to update licensing information New Changes have been made to the way BackOffice handles licensing for more flexibility with licensing options Aura 6 3 1 Changes Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Software Changes 17 BackOffice Fixed Adding or editing expense items through the spreadsheet view no longer causes an access violation After deleting an expense item the item is correctly removed from both the list and spreadsheet views Deleting an expense item while in spreadsheet view no longer causes an error message Improved Temporary database tables are now removed as part of a version upgrade The Update Customer Statistics function has been streamlined and added to the startup of BackOffice When upgrading Aura the number of system setting backups used by the Restore Settings feature is trimmed to the 7 newest entries Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed The Report Viewer will display a more verbose error message if the connection to a remote database fails Inconsistencies between the Stock Purchases and Purchases by Supplier reports have been fixed The GRV report no longer shows a currency symbol The Order Manager reports now have configuration files allowing them to be run through the Report Viewer Improved The Item Sales by Category reports now
193. l is the total order amount including the full VAT amount VAT Back Office will automatically calculate the order amount before VAT according to the items purchased QO If you are purchasing items that are marked as VAT exempt these items will not add any VAT calculations in the purchase These figures now calculates automatically from the VAT exempt setting For more information see the section on the VAT Exempt setting for Stock Items 152 Till Paid From Till Select whether or not this GRV will be paid using cash from a till shift or not After clicking OK Back Office will prompt you to select a till shift to pay the GRV from Amount Paid This option will only be available if paid from till Enter the amount paid from the till shift QO You can pay a GRV partially from a til and the balance from the safe in this case enter only the portion of the amount paid from till and leave the VAT Inc Total as the full amount Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 43 Orders Generated from Order Manager If you have used Aura Purchase Order Manager to generate a purchase order you will be given an option to use the pre generated order once the supplier has been selected This will show a prompt similar to the following Wes wt Browse Purchase Orders Please select a Purchase Order to impart _ DATE CrderNumber Supplier NetCost__ Vat TatalCost R 3 036 95 R 425 14 A 3 462 09 P 2010 11403 10 48 10 AM
194. lbar Locate Specific Record This option will open the locate field value window Navigating Records 27 Ht Filter Dataset This opens an advanced data filter showing only the menu items fitting the criteria specified Dataset Filter 28 zt Print Menu Items Shortcut to the Menu Items With Recipes Report Menu Items With Recipes Report es Picklist Shortcut to the picklist manager Picklist Manager 13 E Refresh Data This option will force a refresh of the menu items listing This will also recalculate menu item costing from the recipes associated to them Category Filter The category filter is used to filter the menu items that are displayed This will not change any menu items this will only restrict the items that are displayed for the current session Show Active Inactive This filter is used to show either the currently active or inactive items only 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 120 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Menu Item Item Code This is a unique alphanumeric code or PLU Price Look Up code to identify the item This is of particular importance when using the keyboard interface of Aura Cashiers are able to quickly go to a section of the menu as soon as they key in the first character of the Item Code W ltem codes must be unique to each menu item BackOffice will not allow you to save a menu item if the code entered is already in use by another item Category
195. le assigned to any waiter Used to post a till shift in the cashup record Cashiers will need this if they are to cashup their own tillshifts Used to post the day s shop cashup record Used to print duplicate copies of historical orders Take note that you will need permission To Browse Old Invoices in order to print them Used to print a kitchen slip showing stock to be manufactured Used to process payment through the NOMAD credit card system Used to refund a NOMAD credit card transaction in Aura Invoicing Used to allow or restrict access to Staff Meal discount codes Without this a user cannot process any staff meals at all Used to create or modify GRVs in the Stock Purchases screen Used to start a new customer order This access permission is no longer in use This access permission is no longer in use Used to print a duplicate copy of a customer slip Used to print a duplicate copy of the customer s credit card Slip Take note that this requires a credit card printer set up in the settings Used to print a duplicate copy of the stock manufacture slip Used to restore all Aura system settings to a specific date or version This option should only be used by instruction from the Aura Helodesk Support Technicians Used to access the Restricted Employee Categories screen Once set up this should only be accessed by the store administrator or owner for security reasons Used to return stock to a supplier from whichh i
196. leave Direct to Port unselected Above you will see two example the left is an example of specifying a printer port on the local computer the right is specifying a printer on a remote computer With a remote printer the context for the device is as follows lt full computer name gt lt printer share name gt 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 194 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 2 3 3 Credit Card Printers Invoice Printers Production Printers Creditcard Printers This specifies the device you wish to use for your credit card printer this will print the credit card slip to this printer depending on your system configuration M Direct To Port Copies i Report None Print line value on kitchen slip M Print totals on kitchen slip W This printer is only used effectively of you have a credit card system called NOMAD installed and configured For more information see the section on the NOMAD Settings 19 If you use any other credit card system it must be configured independently of the Aura system Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 195 8 1 2 4 Touch Screen Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Transaction Screen Category Buttons Panel Rows 2 Cols 6 Button Font Size Othe 7 Keep List Open Medium M Overlap Buttons M Use Large Order Scroller Switch Transaction But
197. leting items from an order 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 219 8 3 Restricted Employee Categories The Restricted Employee Categories window was designed to prevent an employee from editing or adding a new employee to a category that is higher than his her own For example when set up correctly a manager will not be allowed to edit a current or add a new employee record using the category of franchisee wt Restrict Employee Categories lt Employee Categories gt Restricted Categories Unrestricted Categories i Cashier Driver Franchisee Franchisee Kitchen Staff Kitchen Stat Manager Owner Manager Owner Employee Categories You may select the category you wish to edit restrictions for in this list Restricted Categories Displays a list of categories that are restricted from the selected category s access Controls This toolbar contains functions used to maintain the restricted unrestricted categories list Unrestricted Categories Displays a list of categories that are available to edit by the selected category Restricting Categories To prevent a user in the Manager category from adding or editing a user in the Franchisee category you will need to restrict that category from their range of access To begin select the trainee manager category from the left hand side then select Franchisee from Unrestricted Categories and move it to the Restricted Categories Firstselect the desire
198. ll invoices linked to the posted and locked till shifts and will prevent any new till shifts from being activated on this particular trading day Pressing the Post button will present the following prompt SS ti i CX All posted and locked tills will be assigned to this shop cashup This cashup CANNOT be unposted Once locked no more tills can be added to this cashup Post it A posted shop cashup will be displayed similar to the following line shopt Date of Date Oi Time Manager Cach Coupons s Q Shop cashup records do not need to be locked as till shift cashup records do posting a shop cashup completes the cashup for the selected date 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 64 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 3 Get Menus The options found under the Get Menus section are provided to ensure your store is as up to date with the latest menu item prices atall times Three main options are available under this menu Menu Download Menu Activate and Menu Undo The exact function of these options is dependant on your currently installed version of the Aura Enterprise Client WS AEC while version 1 runs a separate window on screen version 2 has been optimised to run more in the background in order to interfere less with the usual flow of business For more information on AEC please contact our support department using the Aura Contact Details 233 Menu Download By selecting this option Aura B
199. m for your store i In cases where a menu is downloaded through Aura Enterprise Client AEC the majority of features in this area of WW the application will be locked to prevent unwanted changes You may still browse and search through any area of the menu design however only certain details will be available for you to manually alter Extra stock control features are located outside of the Stock Menu amongst others these include the Stock Take and the Purchase Stock function These can be found under the Stock section of the Activities Menu For more information see the section on Active Stock Control 37 For more information see the relative topic below e Stock Categories 14 Stock Itemsh4 e Stock Locationsh5 e Items per Location 5 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 147 6 7 1 Categories As with the Menu Items the Stock Items are also grouped by categories The categories are set to simplify searching stock items for active stock control and maintenance This window provides an interface to manage the stock categories list as seen below Stock Categories x li aa H F a o at Category Description P ADVERTISING _ CLEANING CROCKERY Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 Category Lists Lists all currently available stock categories Adding and Removing Categories To add a new category click the T button This will in
200. mmended to refresh this after any of the following steps Adding a New Customer 11 Editing a current Customer s Detailsh1 Running Database Purgel77 and Optimize 76 Running Street Sweeper 8d Customer Statistics Update Process Selecting this option will display the following confirmation prompt Confi rm This will update the customer statistics It may take some time Are you sure you want to continue While the customer s statistics are being updated you will see the following progress bar Updating Customer Stats Do not attempt to close BackOffice while this process is running This involves updating information in your database directly any interruptions could result in data corruption and or data loss 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 6 Lists Lists 99 The Lists menu contains the functions of BackOffice relating directly to the information stored in your database Amongst others this includes your Full Customer List your Supplier Listing your Menu and Stock Items and your Tables List See a topic below for more information Find Invoices 99 6 1 Employees ioh Suppliers 114 Customers 11A Survey Questions 15 Menul118 Stock 140 Expensesli6 f Delivery Areas h6 Streets i65 Over ring Codes 162 Discount Codes h70 Tables h7 Find Invoices The Find Invoices feature gives you the option to go back and review invoices from any previous date regardless
201. n 6 3 9 220 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 4 Kitchen Item Settings i Some store setups opt for simply a touch screen for kitchen computers and do not include a mouse or full VU keyboard In these cases itis easier for managers and technicians to access the Kitchen Items settings window directly from BackOffice The settings screen displayed here provides the same options as Kitchen Items itself kitchen Item Settings When the Kitchen Items settings window is opened you will see a window similar to the example below Settings For Kitchenltem x Connection Settings Display Additional Settings Poll for orders every 5 Se seconds Disable Pending Items Auto print labels W Display sizes in the item description Font Size 10 Use Employee Colours T Start with Windows Allow Windows Shutdown by pressing O Filter by T Only display items for report group Defaut Shifts Till IL Transaction Type Production Printer Original Till ID Filter By Shifts Till ID Enable Shifts Till ID Filter O 0 Collect Delivery Table Orders CI 1 DT HLT ANDREG Cancel Additional Settings Poll for Orders Every lt x gt Seconds This setting configures a timer to check for any new orders from the cashier s tills A generally recommended time is between 5 and 15 seconds Disable Pending Items Selecting this option will disable the display of pending items as they are rung up Display Sizes in
202. n hourly wage then all employees need to be posted to work out their wages correctly For stores that do deliveries Drivers have their deliveries assigned to their clock in record these orders are only completed and paid into a till shift when the driver is posted to a till shift For stores that have tables Waitrons have their table orders assigned to them and they can close a table allowing a new order to be rung up on that table As with the drivers these orders are only paid into a till shift wnen they are posted Ww Ifa driver or waiter has for any reason clocked in more than once in a day all instances of their name in the cashup list must be posted Invoicing treats each time clocked in as an individual employee shift Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 57 Employee Payouts As the name suggests the Employee Payouts feature is an amount paid to the employee other than their standard wages There may be various reasons for using this feature however through any of these keep in mind that this feature is only for any transaction that is not going to be recorded in another area of Aura This is entered as a Single figure for the current cashup only as seen here Enter Total Payouts for System Cashier car Driver Fayment Calculation Total Orders R 0 00 Deliver changes If a figure of R100 is entered the Cashup Summary tab will update to show the following
203. n a daily basis Each sub menu here contains tools relative to the maintenance and recording of various important areas of your store See a topic below for more information Stock 37 e Cashup 55 e Get Menus 645 e Menu Publish This feature will only be used by the head office of a brand it will not work for a standard store e Synchronisel 65 e Capture Operating Expenses 65 e Transactions Purge NOMAD Transactions 67 e Export Data Exporter 68 e Backup Databasel6 8 e Plugins 69 e Add ins 72 e Update Customer Stats 97 e Show Main Screen 235 Note Selecting this option will also clear any password in memory if Persist User is used e Exit This will quit Aura BackOffice Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions 5 1 Stock Activities 37 The Stock features of Aura provide active controls for managing and controlling stock flow into and out of your store The range of options allow for almost any situation that may arise affecting your stock ranging from automatic calculation of the inevitable stock wastage in food preparation for obvious reasons this is easier to track on certain stock types than itis on others to the movement of stock between multiple locations internal and external These functions are essential for correct stock flow information from the reports See a topic below for more information Count Stock 3a Purchase Stock 4 Return Stock 46 Manufacture Stock 47
204. n a filter method is enabled only orders that match the set filter options will be displayed For example By activating the Production Printer filter and selecting Production Printer A Kitchen Items will only show menu items assigned to the selected printer Any items not assigned to Production Printer Aor assigned to a different production printer will not be shown Shifts Till ID Transaction Type Production Printer Original Till ID Filter By Shifts Til Enable Shifts Till ID Filter CI 0 Collect Delivery Table Orders Cl 1 DT HLT A4NDREG Shifts Till ID With this filter enabled you may select to only show menu items on orders that are currently linked to the selected Till ID s Shifts TilID Transaction Type Production Printer Original Till ID Filter By Transaction Typ Enable Transaction Type Filter DI Counter Transaction Type With this filter enabled you may select to only show menu items on orders that are assigned to the selected transaction type s Shifts Til ID Transaction Type Production Printer Original Till ID Filter By Production Printe Enable Printer Filter E Production 4 A Production B Production Printer With this filter enabled you may select to onlyshow menu items assigned to the selected production printer s Shifts Till ID Transaction Type Production Printer Original Till IC Filter By Original Till IL Enable Original Till ID Filter CI O Colle
205. n be accessed here covering mainly the value of sales on the current day and details of employees currently logged into the Aura system these details can be viewed without having to wait for the end of day reports Reports Once a trading day has been completed and closed more details are available through the reporting menu In excess of 150 reports are available for viewing details of previous sales cashups activity logs gross profit vs running costs and many more details Due to the volume of information in the reports this section has it s own guide Please download this from the CoSoft website www CoSoft com Preferences Various options relating to how the Aura POS suite works in your setup are found here you will most likely not need to access this menu very often once your store is setup and running Help Extra information regarding Aura can be accessed here these details cover your specific program version numbers and CoSoft contact details Certain menus contain sub menus these are indicated by a small arrow to the right of the menu option to open a sub menu simply hover the mouse pointer over the desired option for a few seconds as seen in the following example we BackOffice Logo Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Invoices E Find Invoice Employees b Suppliers Drrtnamaoarr To open one ofthe features you need only click once on the desired menu option You d
206. n button is a list of all available production printers Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 141 Alternative Ways to Select Menu Items To select menu items individually click in the box to p Menu Items the left of the menu items as seen below Filter Select All bd ll None DRINKS 2 UTRE 2LCOKE h w DRINKS 2 LITRE 2L CORE LEMON LITE E DERES Oe oe OS LAT UIWORINES 2 LITRE 2b CORE ZERO DRINKS 2 LITRE 2L CREME SODA DRINKS 2 LITRF gt A FANTA In order to select all items in a certain category Menu Items select the desired category from the drop down list Filter Select and then click the All button as seen below All a None DRINKS 2 LITRE 2L CORE DRINES 2 LITRE 2L CORE LEMON LITE Ei DRINKS 2 LITRE 2L COKE LIGHT DRINKS 2 LITRE 2L COKE ZERO DRINKS 2 LITRE 2L CREME SODA NAIN ES 2 LITRE Al FANTA a a a a a Fa Notice how the None button is not available when no items are selected justas the All button is not available if all W items are already selected This is a quick and simple way to see if all items within the current filter are selected or not especially handy if the listis too long to fiton one screen To select all items in the complete menu change the category filter back to All and then click on the All button This will select all items in all categories Assigning Selected Items to Printers Once the desired items are selected the next step i
207. n the background image off Stretch Selecting this option will cause Invoicing to stretch the image to fit the available size This is not advisable for smaller images as they will be unclear and badly distorted if they are stretched too far Preview This block gives you a preview of the background image selected 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 196 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 2 5 Devices Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Till Settings Till Drawer Device jcomt Monitor Primary Pole Display Device None M Use HiSense Till Drawer Pole Display Make None Hisense Type NONE Use Fingerprint for Invoicing M Auto Prompt for Barcode Scanner Use Fingerprint for BackOffice Kitchen Item Font Blue Kitchen Item Background E White Phone Edenin j Kitchen Item IP Add s ie a ee bes CLI Ringing Timeout 120 Display Pending Immediately l Log System Times Till Drawer Device If there is one connected this would be set to the device that your till cash drawer is connected to ie COM1 or LPT2 or select your printer if that is where itis connected Monitor Primary Secondary Tertiary Select the main display output for the Aura system Unless you have multiple displays leave this on Primary Pole Display Device and Pole Display Make Select the make model and connection for your pole display Use HiSens
208. n this example Trainee Manager has just been added For more information see the section on Employee Records ho 6 2 2 2 Editing Employee Records ah To edit a current employee from the toolbar click on the a button This will open the Edit an Employee wizard as with adding a new employee From this screen you may now update the information relating to the selected employee 7 7 W Do not change the Employee value for an existing employee this unique number is used to link the selected employee to trading information clock in and out records and activity records in your Aura system Changing this number may cause issues for the selected employee Editing Employee Discount and Access Control Settings Once you are satisfied with the information entered on the Employee Details page click on Next button to proceed to the second step as with adding a new employee From this screen you may now update the employee s individual settings such as their category discount settings or fingerprint Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 109 Scanning Fingerprints Vs The Check Set Fingerprint button is used for maintaining employee fingerprints Before A Finger Print Is using fingerprints there are a couple of important points that you should keep in mind Needed Fi int l jii oea ia Ensure that both the fingerprint scanner s glass and the employee s f
209. nce at hh mm ss Using this first option will run once on each day at the specified time only after having run for one day the next run will be on the next recurring day Occurs every x hours minutes Starting at hh mm ss and Ending at hh mm ss Using this second option allows you to set the batch to run every certain number of minutes or hours for a select period of the day For example you could set the batch to run every hour from 9 00am to 10 00pm while the store is trading while not running any earlier than 9 00am or later than 10 00pm Duration Start Date yyyy mm dd End date yyyy nm dd and No end date If the schedule you are setting up is only needed from a certain date and not immediately you may specify a future date here to Start the report batch schedule Along side this you may specify an end date as well or leave the latter option on No end date to have this schedule run indefinitely You may come back and edit this setting later if you need to do so Monthly Seen here is an example of the default Monthly recurrence schedule Frequency E Day The Daily Frequency Occurs once at Occurs every Duration Start date 2011 06 10 Explanation of settings Frequency Day x of every x month s or The first second last Day of every x months Select either the first or second option here Using the first option will allow you to specify the
210. ng to assign is notin the list you may need to set up the category first For more information see the section on Maintaining Employee Categories ho If the category you need is in the employee category list butis not available when adding a new employee you may not have the required permissions to select the desired category For more information see the section on Restricted Employee Categories 219 Set Password Click on this button to set a password for the employee You will need the employee to enter his desired password twice in the following screen then click on OK New Password Enter The New Password _ Confirm The New Password 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 106 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual If the setting to enable a separate Invoicing password has been enabled you will see the following button below the Set Password option Set Password Set Invoicing Password T Pines Meliweries This secondary password is an Invoicing only access code the code set here will not allow access to Aura BackOffice For added security itis highly advisable that all managers and franchise owners set a secondary password for their Invoicing access For more information on setting look for Enable Separate Invoicing Password found under Program Settings gt Generall203 Does Deliveries If the new em
211. ning correctly The entry field for commission on individual menu items was previously missing from BackOffice When upgrading a database from the previous version range 5 x the historical line item VAT rate was not updated correctly Certain license settings were causing an error message to appear when opening Invoicing Historic weighted invoice discounts and weighted delivery charges will be recalculated during the database update On some systems BackOffice was not reporting the correct live menu version After temporarily bypassing the fingerprint scan prompt BackOffice was not re enabling the fingerprint scanner correctly The rounding calculations in BackOffice were previously preventing certain orders from balancing Certain situations caused the Return Stock Vouchers to not balance this has been fixed Improved Licensing information can now be reviewed under the Help gt Licensing menu Various enhancements have been added to the stock variance calculation to improve the calculation speed Your unique Aura Enterprise Store ID and currently active menu version numbers are now shown in the status bar of BackOffice Anew permission has been included to control access to historic stock takes Anew column has been included to improve the accuracy of calculated delivery charges on orders containing multiple brands this will affect combo stores only New Command line parameters has been added to BackOffice to allow our h
212. nless a valid Aura license is found The structure of the Analysis reports have been altered to allows the sub report headers to be translated as well The Month to Date and History to Date fields on the Driver Cashup Detail report have been extended to prevent cutting off data The Invoice Efficiency report s general layout has been improved The Report Scheduler application interface can now be translated into other languages Sending emails will now attempt to use a public Amazon provided service first with the current mail settings kept as a fail Safe The head count calculations for the Average Sales per Head report have been improved to cater for orders with no head count assigned All the reports have been checked to ensure the employee name and current date and time are printed on each report when itis run All cashup reports relating to till or shop cashups now display a warning message in the report header if any outstanding orders are found for the selected report date range The Report Scheduler now accepts a runtime parameter to manually select a language for translations The Report Viewer has been updated to display messages correctly if an error does occur The email address added to the footer of emailed schedules has been updated to the latest support email address New New report added Stock Wastage Detailed New report added Monthly Beverage Incident New report added Stock Purchases by Type New report
213. nloaded menu is moved to become the active menu By these steps performing a menu undo will only allow you to go back one menu revision If you need to revert to an older menu than this feature allows please contact the Aura Helpdesk for assistance Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 65 5 4 Synchronise The Synchronise feature is provided to allow your store to upload sales data history to your head office This is a very important feature of the Aura POS system allowing a central point for a franchise to evaluate and optimise sales throughout the entire brand name In the introduction to the Reports section you will see that a failure to synchronise regularly has adverse effects on your Aura system QO The exact function of this option is dependant on your currently installed version of the AEC while version 1 runs a separate window on screen version 2 has been optimised to run in the background in order to interfere less with the usual flow of business For more information on AEC please contact our support department using the Aura Contact Details 233 5 5 Capture Operating Expenses The Capture Expenses feature is used to enter payments that are not directly linked to any profit inducing expenses This may include utility bills repairs to the store equipment or various other store expenses that do not add or affect your stock items Before an expense may be captured in Aura though a record must be c
214. ns Menu Overview 72 Advertising Royalty Percentages Allow Reprint 190 Assign Items to Kitchen Printer 140 Auto Apply Discounts 173 Auto Backup Feature 208 Auto Prompt to Add Operators Auto Restart Transaction 202 Auto fill Form Settings Stock Purchases and Manufacture 207 B Backup Database 68 Backup Settings 208 Blind Cashup 205 Business Settings 199 Button Sizes Menu Items and Categories 195 C Capture Operating Expenses 65 Cashup Overvew 55 Cashup Settings 205 Categories Employee 101 Categories Menu Items 118 Categories Stock Items 147 Check For Updates 227 Clear NOMAD Log File 67 Contact Details 233 Count Stock 38 Credit Card Printers Setup 194 Credit Card Setup NOMAD 197 Customer List 112 Customer Notes 202 Customer Search Fields 207 Customer Slip Printers Setup 193 D Daily Sales Monitoring 181 Data Exporter 68 Database Optimiser 76 212 200 203 Version 6 3 9 Database Purge 77 Dataset Filter 24 DB Backup 68 Default Transaction Type 188 Delivery Areas 164 Departments Menu Items 117 Design Floor Plan 72 Devices Settings 196 Dialup IP Address 225 Disable Employee Wages Disable Petty Cash 205 Discard Stock 51 Discount Reasons 170 Discounts Auto Apply 173 Discounts Time Based 176 Driver Cashup 56 Driver Gets Delivery Charge 205 205 E Edit Employee 108 Email Server Settings Employee Cashup 56 Employee Categories 101 Employee Category Access
215. ntains all the street names and suburb associations for your delivery setup Itis essential that the streets are set up correctly to ensure that the customers can be added without any problems F BackOffice Street list Ioj Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Street list Prete ee ss Ae Street n Suburbs Delivery Areas Travel Time Purchase Stock att Toolbar For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 This button will open the locate field value window to allow you to search for a street record A This option is used to create a filter for the street list This is described further down in this topic Preparing to Add a New Street Reference Before inserting a new street there are a few Steps to take first These steps involve setting up the list of street names suburbs and delivery areas These are available by the buttons to the right of the standard toolbar as seen below Street Names Suburbs Delivery Areas W If the required street name suburb and delivery area reference is already set up in the Aura system you may skip this step and move on to Adding Streets below Clicking each of these three buttons will take you o a new window in order to set up the required information The Delivery Areas feature is also available directly from the Lists Menu For more information see one of these three sections Street Names h 6 Suburbs h6 or D
216. nvoicing will not allow any order below this amount to be set as a delivery order 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 200 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Purchase Orders Address line 1 City Address line 2 Area Code Contact Purchase Orders Address lines 1 and 2 These two lines are available to enter your store s shop and street address lines Contact Enter a contact number for the person responsible for receiving the orders City Enter the city name here Area Code Enter the area code here 8 1 3 2 Head Office Settings Store Settings Head Office Settings Program Settings Network Settings Report Group Defaut Advertising 6 Royalty 6 Report Group Select the menu items report group you would like to set or view the advertising and royalty percentages for Ww The report groups are set up for each menu item individually used specifically in a combo store with two or more franchises running on one system In that scenario itis highly likely that each store chain would have different advertising and royalty percentages For more information see the section on setting up Report Groups h2 Advertising Enter the percentage of your gross profit that head office receive to cover their advertising costs Royalty Enter the percentage of your gross profit that head office require as a royalty Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 201 8 1 3
217. o not need to double click on any menu options Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Toolbar Navigation Getting Started With BackOffice 25 On the left hand side of all screens in BackOffice you will see the navigation toolbar This toolbar contains the majority of options found under the standard menus along the top Activities Lists Monitoring etc In order to navigate to another screen simply click once on the icon for the desired option Most of the toolbar sections will have too many links to display on one screen in this case you will see a down arrow used to scroll further down the toolbar You will also notice when scrolling down that a second arrow will appear at the top to scroll back up As seen in the two screen shots 1a and 1b below Achyites 1a liste 1b In order to switch between different menu lists simply click on the list name that you wish to expand Doing this will automatically compact any other icon list currently displayed and move it to its relative position in the list As seen by the example images 2a 2b and 2c to the right In example 2a the Activities toolbar is active When switching to another toolbar the currently active toolbar in this case Activities will compact and the newly selected bar will expand In example 2b the Lists toolbar has been selected and in 2c the Reports toolbar has been selected Actwittes Count Stock Purchase Shock Return S
218. o the cheapestitems matching the requirements therefore leaving the more expensive items at full cost Get For Free Get lt x gt items for free Select the number of items that are marked down to a zero value regardless of what discount amount is specified Tick the box on the very right hand side of the Get For Free section to activate this option Apply Discount To Apply discount to lt x gt items Select the number of items that the specified discount is applied to for example 10 off R20 off etc Tick the box on the very right hand side of the Apply Discount To section to activate this option O You can select either one or both of the Get For Free and Apply Discount To sections but keep in mind the items thatthe discountis applied to is restricted by the number of required items Therefore with the Match setto a quantity of 2 Get For Free and Apply Discount To may not add up to more than 2 as seen below Get For Fee Get fi items tor free Appl Discount To i 0h dicount to fi items In this case the discount set up earlier will apply to one item and the second item will be free of charge 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 176 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 12 2 Time Based Discounts If you wish to have certain discount codes available only during certain hours of the day or even only on specified days of the week you will need to seta time schedule for the discount Near the lowe
219. o the layout of the Till Cashup Summary report The Time and Attendance report can now be run for all employees or only for a specific employee The date range label on report headers was not consistent this label has now been updated to read From date to date for all reports using a date range The graph on the Top Menu Item Sales report now displays the user selected number of items to report in place of the N in the graph title Selecting date ranges for reports will only allow an End Date that is after the Start Date New New logic has been added to the Report Viewer to cover the AEC override from Head Office stores for the Royalty Report Excludes Delivery Charges setting Invoicing Fixed Aconflict with the keyboard shortcuts for the Activate and Open Till functions has been resolved The keyboard shortcut to Start a new till shiftis now Alt A Manually entering special orders no longer throws up an access violation message An issue causing reprinted Counter orders to include Paid Online details has been resolved The OK button on the New Menu Activated message displayed in Invoicing correctly dismisses the message without waiting for the timer to finish counting down Processing a credit card payment on a till without a slip printer connected no longer prevents the NOMAD transaction from being completed Reprinting a NOMAD credit card slip from Invoicing no longer prints garble
220. oduction printers These features are described in more detail further down Departments Once departments have been set up you may specify which departments a menu item is a part of This will not only open up categorizing options for nvoicing but for the reports as well For more information see the section on Menu Item Departments 132 Images W This section refers to settings used by an old Aura application called Aura Imaging This application is no longer in use Optional Items Menu items set as optional items are active and available from Aura Back Office at any time but only from Aura Invoicing once ithas been marked as an Optional Item In Use To set an item as an Optional Item tick the box shown below Menu lem Inactive Display Child iter Don t print Tal 1 1st 1 Prompt for quantity Price ls Locked x Once an item is ticked as an Optional Item you will see a new option in the Menu Item Description section atthe top of this window As seen in the below example IH WIBECl PIM COM GOY CINICI AL Loge pig CsCl Mm 131 42 Slip Descr lA THIRST FOR CONY Size Cost Price W If your store is part of a larger chain and your menu is downloaded from head office you will most likely be locked out and be unable to edit menu items If this is the case you will not be able to change the Optional Item field but you will still be allowed to check and uncheck Optional Menu Item In Use
221. of whether the invoice is part of a posted and locked till shift or not From this feature you can not only view the order that was processed along with any discounts applied but also re print a duplicate copy of the invoice if needed Selecting Date to Browse Invoices To access this information select Lists gt Invoices gt Find Invoice from the menus along the top This will display the following window To begin first select the date from the calendar drop down list as seen here 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 Browse Invoices x oo ooa x Enter Dat 18 October 2012 October 2012 M Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 3 e J 10 141 12 17 g 19 24 25 2 28 29 30 7 Z Today 2012710718 100 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Browsing Orders on the Selected Date After selecting the desired date click on OK to show a list of all invoices on the selected date You will be presented with a window similar to the one below P Order History ol x Previous Order 1158651 2012 01 01 09 23 07 F 1 0 1158650 2012 01 01 09 20 30 F 1 Jed 0 1158649 2072 01 01 09 19 36 F 1 of 6 0 1158648 2072 01 01 09 19 27 F 1 163 6 0 Order Detail Description 1 40070 Fillet Hake Grilled 1 40070 Fillet Hake Grilled 1 40070 Fillet Hake Grilled 1 40070 Fillet Hake Grilled From this window you may now browse through the orders for the selected date in the Previous Orders section at t
222. office branch where the item code may not be the same atall stores Recipe Urdering Deposit Stock Costing The Head Office Code will not affect anything ata store level unless your menu download includes these codes X your store would not benefit from having these set Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 157 6 7 2 3 Deposit The Deposit tab allows you to enter a deposit value for a single measure of the selected stock item Certain stock items that must be captured in the GRV Goods Received Voucher screen are required to return to the supplier at a later point in time These suppliers require a deposit on the item while in your possession One example of these items is a crate from ABI Recipe Ordering Deposit The deposit value comes into effectin the GRVs under the Returns feature Returning an Unit Deposit Value FA 0 00 item thathas a deposit seton it will credit the store with the required amount per unit returned Please ensure thatthe value here is for one unit and not a batch when entered 6 7 3 Locations The Stock Locations can be used to keep track of stock in multiple stock locations separately For instance if you would like to keep track of the cold room stock meats dairy products etc and the dry goods flour sugar salt etc separately you will first need to set up the different locations When opening the stock locations for the first time you will be presented with th
223. oice discounts will only be applied to the invoice as a whole based on items that have not been discounted by line item discounts Value invoice discounts will only applied if the invoice total is greater than the discount amount In other words If each item has a line item discount of any type a percentage based invoice discount will not do anything only a value based invoice discount will work 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 172 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Staff Meal This option is used to help separate the discount reasons from normal customer discounts Selecting this option will change the way this discount responds inside Invoicing oa For more information on how this affects staff members applying discounts see the section on Employee Discount Ww Settings ho Late Delivery If the discount being set up is to be used to mark a delivery as late according to your individual store s requirements select this option Active If this is selected this discount will be available from nvoicing With this de selected it will not be available Status Any discounts with a status of Controlled will be made active or inactive with regards to the discounts on the downloaded menu any discounts with a status of Open will remain active with a new menu download regardless of discounts in the downloaded menu Auto Apply This option can be set to automatically apply the desired discount when certain men
224. on see the Your Aura system must have atleast one Report Group set up before this feature is available Currently this must section on Menu Item Report Groups M3 Working With Report Groups When using the Items Per Report Group option you will see a screen similar to the following m BackOffice Menu Items Per Report Group Joe Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Menu Items Per Report Group Report Group ne Current Report Group Default Count Stock Search P A ltem Included In Default i Excluded _ Categoy Code ltemDesc A Grouping Category Coe ree DRINKS 2L SCHWEP 2L SCHWEPPES LEMON LITE DRINKS D2LCS 2L CREME SODA pe DRINKS DA APPLETIZER DRINKS DAMS AGUA MONTE STILL WATER Return Stock DRINKS DAMSP AQUA MONTE SPARKLING we DRINKS DAMST AGUA MONTE STILL 1 5L DRINKS DBA BONAGQUA APPLE MINT DRINKS DBI BONAQUA LITCHI Manufacture Shock DRINKS DBL BLACK LABEL DRINKS DEN BONAQUA NAARTJIE 9 DRINKS DBS BONAQUA STILL DRINKS DBT BONAGUA STRAWBERRY eae DRINKS DEWAM BONAQUA APPLE amp MINT DRINKS DB WL BONAGUA LITCHI lt a DRINKS DEWLL BONAQUA LEMON LITE DRINKS DEWN BONAGUA NAARTJIE Transter CRINES DBMS BON4OUA STRAWBERRY stock DRINKS DBWwSS BONAGUA STILL DRINKS DEWST BONAGUA SPARKLING DRINKS DC COKE DRINKS DEIL 1L COKE DRINKS DCL 2L COKE DRINKS DC350 COKE 350ML CUP DRINKS pcso COKE S00ML CUP DRINKS DCB BUDDY COKE DRINKS DCEZ BUDDY COKE ZERO _ Monitoring DRINKS DE
225. on about your server computer to diagnose a software problem The Support Information features collects detailed information regarding the hardware and related software versions and provides you with three options for sharing this information with whoever requires it W No personal information such as license keys or passwords will be collected with this support information Only people you choose to share this information with will have access to it To access this information select Support Information from the Help menu When the Support Information opens you will see a window similar to the following example F AURA Support Information J i loj x Running from C Program Files Alphapos Aura StorelD 4 Menu Version 374 BackOrtice 2 6 3 8 38 Invoicing 6 3 8 39 BriverStation 3 8 35 Ritchenitem 6 3 8 35 OrderManager 6 38 35 REC ie all ela E Report ocheduler 6 3 8 35 AuraUpdater I 33 0 0 i Copy To Clipboard Send Email to Support Send Email If you would like to confirm the contents of the information before sending this data to anybody all the information WV collected by this feature is provided here for you to view Sending Support Information Three methods are available for sharing this information with a computer technician Copy to Clipboard This option simply copies the support information to the clipboard allowing you to paste the text into an email or text document Send Em
226. on in a different format The manager will need to decide whether or not to have this option selected Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 203 8 1 3 3 2 Invoicing General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email Tables Prompt for Head Count Prevent a waiter clocking out if they have open tables Transaction Screen M Alphapos Classic Keyboard Mode M Auto Prompt To Add New Till Operators Payment Tender Amounts Tender 1 10 Colour I Green Tender 3 50 Colour Maroon Tender 2 20 Colour j Olive green Tender 4 100 Colour Navy blue Use Order Reference Words Update tron File Tables Prompt for Head Count When starting a new table order nvoicing will automatically display a prompt asking for a table head count Prevent a waiter clocking out if they have open tables Selecting this option will not allow a waiter to clock out of the system if they have any tables that are not closed or paid into a till shift Transaction Screen Alphapos Classic Keyboard Mode This option will enable or disable the classic keyboard shortcuts in both touch screen and normal keyboard mode It is recommended to keep this option selected all the time Auto Prompt to Add New Till Operators Selecting this option works in conjunction with a new feature of Aura Invoicing If this option is selected and a non operat
227. on to the Aura application 127 0 0 1 is called a loop back address telling Windows to look at the computer where the program is run from With a standard Aura installation the Invoicing application is always installed on the server computer Display Pending Immediately This setting has been putin place in preparation for a new feature to improve Invoicing and Kitchen Monitor integration Log System Times This is an old setting Phone Extension Optional If you have an advanced phone switchboard with multiple lines and extensions including a phone at each till you can enter the extension number here CLI Ringing Timeout Caller Line Identification This will be the time in minutes before an incoming call expires Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 197 8 1 2 6 Reports Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Report settings Use slip printer reports Use Slip Printer Reports By selecting this option you may print certain reports to a narrow slip printer similar to your invoice or production printers wD Take note that not all reports will run correctly with this format itis highly recommended that the reports are always printed to a full size A4 printer such as an HP Canon or Lexmark printer 8 1 2 7 Credit Card Invoicing Settings Printer Settings Printer Setup Touch Screen Devices Reports Credit Card Credit Card Re
228. onal In Use for all items shown in the filter on the right simply click the double left arrow as seen in the example below i Optional Menu Items ees Menu Items Added Menu lteng All Menu Iteme Humber of menu items to add 42 Search Filter ICE CREAMS BUDDY COKE LIGHT BUDDY FANTA ORANGE FRUIT COCKTAIL BUDDY FANTA GRAPE GRAPETIZER RED VALPRE MINERAL WATER STILL MANGO ORANGE JUICE POWERADE JAGGED ICE POWERADE MOUNTAIN BLAST POWERADE ORANGE POWERADE NAARTJIE 2L SPRITE BUDDY SPRITE IMPULSE CARAMEL FING CONE J IMPULSE KING CONE MEGA 2L COKE LIGHT POWERADE ISLAND BURST POWERADE TROPICAL STORM Keep in mind that the Search filter only affects the list of items on the right the list on the left will show all optional menu items that are currently included in your menu Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 137 6 6 5 Picklists With certain menu items the customer may have various options relating to the specific item they chose For example with a breakfast they could have the eggs soft or hard boiled a choice of vegetables or mashed potato etc This is done bycreating a customized list of options and assigning that list to a menu item Apicklist may also be assigned to a category allowing Invoicing to display the desired picklist once any menu item in that category is rung up These lists of o
229. ont _ BREAKFASTS 1 Brush E Lime El PIZZAS Transaction Setting BEVERAGES 2 Grid Font I Custom CHIPS 3 ro DRINKS z Indent j BURGERS 3 BEER EXTRAS 4 comens 4 None zl DESSERT 5 ape M WRAPS 5 Default INSTRUCTIONS E S i SIDES E Order i KIDS MEALS 7 7 Hidden Category l Description This shows the name of the category Sort Order This column displays the selected sorting order for each category If the sort order is leftas 0 categories will be sorted alphabetically Font This selects the colour of the text that will appear on the category button in the touchscreen interface of Aura Invoicing Brush This selects the colour of the button background for the category button in Invoicing Grid Font This will affect the text colour of the menu items as the cashier s ring them up inside nvoicing Indent This setting will force an indentation on a new order for all items assigned to this category Hot Key Inside nvoicing this feature is to seta shortcut key to go to the desired category regardless of what category you are currently viewing You may select any of the function keys F1 through F12 number keys or letters In Touch Screen Mode these hot keys will display as an extra panel along the bottom of the of the menu items VU display in the order in which they are assigned here See the Invoicing manual for more information on this Type This is a new function which has not b
230. option and select Edit Parameter or you may left click on a parameter and click the Edit button on the toolbar above 3 Batch Schedules fs Weekly Monitor a Employee Cashup fall Activity Report by Activity Code fa Product Sales by Cashier al Late Delivery Summary by Date DateTime a Time and Attendance Report W SuppressDetail Hides additional report detail True False O Different reports will have different parameters but all will at the very least contain a single date or date range _ selectors In the example above this report uses a date range as well as an option to suppress detail and simplify the report The date selectors must be configured but if the extra settings are not customized then the report s default settings will be used Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 95 Other report parameters provide different values for your report the most important of which is the date range selection With reports that are run from one date to another the start and end dates must be set individually Below is an example of the dialog used to set the Start Date of a report The End Date selector allows the same options as the Start Date allowing a very versatile date range selection based on the date at which the report batch is being run The values available to you here allow the following selections First Current Last day of the Current Previous Next Month Year
231. or on a till shift attempts to put through a counter order Invoicing will ask if a second operator should be added By clicking yes to that prompt it follows the same procedure as adding an operator manually Payment Tender Amounts Tender 1 to 4 These four options create buttons on the Customer Payment Screen found inside nvoicing For more information on the application of these buttons please see the nvoicing Manual Use Order Reference Words These words will be used on customer s orders in place of the default order number When this option is ticked the Update from File button below it will be available Update from File Select this to importa text file with a custom word list Please note this list must be in standard text format with no more than one word per line Once the words are imported into Aura the text file is no longer needed but it is advisable to keep it as a backup 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 204 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 3 3 3 Reports General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging stock Search Backup PaleDisplay Picklists Updates Email General Report Settings M Use Trading Day for Royalty Report l Show Vat Excl amounts in Sales Reports Use Stocktake Times in Stock Variance GP Reports Exclude Delivery Charges from Royalty Report Calculate GP as Inverse of FC Automatically Calculate Manufactured Stock Show Discounts on Reports Stock cost calculat
232. our CoSoft website For more information with getting started on the Aura system see the following sections Navigating Tools 24 Quick Start Checklist 30 Alternatively if you are already familiar with the Aura system you may prefer to jump directly to one of the following sections for a more detailed list of features and functions e Activities 3e e Lists 99 e Monitoringhs e Reports e Preferences 180 e Helpl225 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 24 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 3 1 Navigating Tools Menu Navigation Along the top of the BackOffice window are the standard application menus all options in Aura BackOffice are available from these menus Below is an example of the menu bar i BackOffice Logo Jog Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities To simplify the process of finding the desired options refer to the following guide for each menu option Activities Store administration activities such as capturing stock takes entering stock purchases returns and performing shop or till cashups can be found here This is the active side of the BackOffice application Lists Details stored within the Aura system can be viewed and maintained here various lists of data are available including discount codes overring reasons menu items stock items and employee records Monitoring Certain details of real time trading information ca
233. our keyboard Below is an example of selecting multiple permissions using the ctrl key To Abandon n Invoice To Access Expense Categories To Access Expense Items i To Access Expense Payments To Access Menu lems To Access Stock terns To 4ccess The Menu ltem Selector To Activate Or Disable Plugins Toa dd n Fenense Paurment Foralistofthe available access permissions and a description of their functions see the section on List of Access W Permissionsl14 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 214 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Rolling Back Changes Rollback A If you made a mistake during the aforementioned process you may press the _Bolback button to reset all permissions to the point at which this screen was opened lf Back Office was able to successfully roll back all changes you will be presented with the following window Taformation aE i Successfully rolled the changes back W Be careful not to accidentally press the Rollback button you cannot undo an undo Grant All vs Deny All The Grant All and Deny All buttons are there to allow more quickly editing a category For example if you are adding a new Trainee Manager category and you wish the manager to have access to the majority of the system but not unlimited the quickest procedure would be to grant all permissions and then remove the desired permissions Access Permission List Filter The list o
234. oy 0 eee ir Messite Deccrinton Bos RE EEE Discard CCCAR2 O 25 EACH _ 2 CUP CARRI R012 El DP SC7O EACH FOML SAUCE CO AO19 PACKAGING Stock 120 2693 TEACH DOME LID R 0 35 DEO02 EACH ABI IL R 8 76 DRINKS 30 3697 1 EACH FREEZ0 CUF A 1 01 gt obo EACH ABI 2L F 11 78 DRINKS A 15104 OOS LITRE MILE FRESH R 0 60 DDABIE EACH ABI BUDDY R 5 34 DRINKS i nate 593 0 19 LITRE SOFT SERWE A 22r DDABIC EACH AEI CANS F 5 45 DRINKS Stack 30 3693 TEACH STRAWS BRA DMIACC RAND ACCOUNTING F R 0 00 MISC Bl DP ACUL EACH ACUTEMP LABE 70 00 PACKAGING ze DAD GEN RAND ADVERTISING G FR 0 00 ADVERTISING ay DOIG EACH AQUA MONTES R 0 00 DRINKS Cashup boos EACH AQUA MONTES R 1 46 DRINKS DMI AURA RAND AURA RODO MISC A DWAD KG Awo R 36 73 VEGETABLES Wier YAWO KG AvD PUREE R 30 15 SAUCES Download DMODZ KG BACON R46 08 MEAT DC100 SACHET BACTERAX F 0 00 CLEANING p DM CS EACH BALLOON CUP RO 00 ADVERTISING tek DABI 100 BALLOONS R 0 00 ADVERTISING Activat DOCS500 EACH BALTIMORE CH R 0 00 ICE CREAMS a5 boss00 EACH BALTIMORE ST R 0 00 ICE CREAMS DOVEOO EACH BALTIMORE Va 10 50 ICE CREAMS Monitoring DV BAN KG BANANA R 0 00 VEGETABLES E DMI BANK_ RAND BANK FEES R 0 00 MISC i Keyboard shortcuts can now be used to navigate to the previous or next menu item in the current filter Alt left arrow to move to the previous record Alt right arrow to move to the next record Navigation Too
235. plays the amount excluding VAT this figure will work out automatically from the VAT Inclusive amount Order Quantity Select the default quantity for the selected item Active Select whether or not the selected item is active and available or not Vat Ex Select whether or not the item is VAT exempt or not If ticked the item does not have any VAT Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 163 6 8 2 Categories The Expense Categories window is used to maintain categories for your expense records If you have no expense categories entered upon opening this feature you will be presented with the following screen Expense Categories E TES TE p a Pe SERA ae BS ii Category Description Adding New Expense Item Categories ae Click on the button to create a new category then enter a name for the category and click the n button to save With categories added you should see something similar to the following Expense Categories J x i a H p a iti Category Description You may now add expense items to the list For more information see the section on Expense Itemshe 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 164 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 9 Delivery Areas The Delivery Areas window is used to set up specific delivery area settings to link to the Street List This can also be accessed by Lists gt Streets or by clicking on the Delivery Areas button inside the S
236. plays the cost to store of the specified stock item as per the quantity entered in the recipe Centre Toolbar El ee J Use this button to search for all menu items that have the selected stock item in their recipe Adds the selected stock item to the recipe for the current menu item Removes the selected stock item on the left from the menu item recipe oe gt Removes ALL items from the menu item recipe EE By Copies the current recipe to the computer clipboard for later use ER Pastes the recipe currently in the clipboard into the current menu item Scale all stock item quantities in the recipe by a percentage Stock List The right half of this tab lists all your stock items that can be used in a recipe StockNoO Displays the unique stock item code Desc Displays the full description of the item Measure Displays the unit of measure for the stock item Cost Displays the cost to store of the specified stock item Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 155 Adding Items to a Recipe To create a recipe begin with the Stock items liston the right hand side Search for the desired stock item by typing the description in the Search block as seen below Stock Search ham Filter ALL _ STOCKNO Desc Measure BE O25 Granadella Twist 340ml ce each FA 0 00 PE O28 Grease Proof Paper each A 0 00 FVOO Green Pepper kg R 0 00 GRUSS Grill Basting MAD Lrt R 0 00 LIQ O45 Grunbe
237. ployee is a driver tick this option If not leave this option clear Is a Waitron If the new employee is a waiter tick this option If not leave this option clear KI Colour This option affects the Aura Kitchen Items application any items assigned to a specific employee will show up with their colour to identify who is responsible for that order Check Set Fingerprint Use this option to scan in a new fingerprint or check the currently scanned fingerprint Clear Fingerprint Use this option to clear any fingerprint currently scanned for this employee In order to use the above two functions you will need to have a compatible fingerprint scanner installed Contact our YU Aura Help Desk for more information on fingerprint scanners In order to save the fingerprints correctly you will need to save the employee without a fingerprint and edit the employee afterwards to scan a fingerprint For more information see the section on Editing Employee Records ho Max Discount Percentage Enter the highest percentage discount that this employee can assign to any invoice Max Discount Value Enter the highest rand value discount that this employee cam assign to any invoice Staff Discounts Max Monthly Spend Enter the maximum amount this employee can receive in staff meals Max Discount Percentage Enter the highest percentage discount this employee can assign as a Staff meal discount Max Discount Value Enter the highest rand value dis
238. ptimise them to find a more cost effective method Ww Keep in mind Manufactured Stock Items will not how up under this screen For more information see the section on Manufacture Stock 47 a BackOffice Stock Purchases oles Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Purchase Stock GRY GRY Date 28 October 2010 Ee Colour Indicators Rea ee Balanced GRV 1 Retumed Stock Cul 5 gt GR Lines BB Unbalanced GRY Telephone Supplier Ref Purch Price VAT Grv Saved From Till feed Seng lee e Returns Print Purchase Stock g Goods Received Voucher Header Details Return Stack OCE PUICNASES A ee eh pee eE na al a A Maan S Stock Description Measure Unit Cost Bulk Qty Price Exel Price Incl StockLocation e ee ee Transfer Stack Goods Received Voucher hem Details Cashup bal Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Stock Purchases Entered So Far 0 00 Amount Needed 0 00 GAY STATUS 0 00 Retail License License Renewal Date 01 April 2011 GRV List Area GRV Date Select the date for which you would like to view or enter a goods received voucher lt gt pale Use these buttons to browse through the previous and following dates one day ata time Colour Indicators This colour legend displays the status of your GRVs as per the lines in the list of GRVs This is described in more detail below Keys Use these shortcut keys to change the focus between
239. ptions or Picklists can be set up here W Picklist Creator Manager f File Actions Menuitern Location All items from all locations Items with Picklists Picklists Menu Items Categories Categories with Picklists g By Code a search f By Description Description A ADVERT POSTCARDS CB2P5 2 PIZZA AND SUB CBFM FAMILY MEAL CEFR 2 LARGE FIZAA amp CEMO MEAL FOR 2 CEFL REAL DEAL PIZZA CBSL REAL DEAL HOT 5 C51 COCKTAIL SAUSA D2LCS 2 LITRE 2L CREME SOD DA CAN APFLE TIZER DAMS FOOML AGUA MONTE STI DAM SP FOOML AQUA MONTE SPA DBL 340ML BLACK LABEL DEWAN FOOML BONAGUA APPLE DBWwL FOOML BOMAGQUA LITCHI DBWLL FOOML BONAGUA LEMON DB Wh FOOML BONAGUA NASRT DB WS FOOML BONAGUA STAA DBwSS FOOML BONAGQUA STILL ee DEST FOOML BONAGUA SPARE Compulsory DL LAN COKE OCeL 2 LITRE 2L COKE Number of selections allowed a DCE FOOML BUDDY COKE DCEZ FOOML BUDDY CORE ZERO DCCLL CAN COKE LEMON LIGHT DCL CAN COLA LITE Picklist Selection Price Picklist Item Selection Size Items With Picklists left panel This displays a list of menu items and menu categories that currently have picklists assigned to them Picklists center panel This displays a list of picklists that are currently available to assign to a menu item With picklist specific options atthe bottom Picklist Selection Price By selecting one of these three options
240. r n a Manager Manager Cashier Manager Manager Manager n a n a Manager n a Manager n a To Change Logout Time For An Employeen a 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Description Used to abandon an invoice before being saved Used to access the Expense Categories screen Used to access the Expense Items screen Used to access the Capture Operating Expenses screen Used to access the Menu Items list Used to access the Stock Items list Used to access the Menu Item Selector inside a new order Used to set the active plugins for Aura Used to capture a new Expense Payment record Used to create new menu items Used to increase or descrease the item quantity in a new order Used to change the description of Menu Items Used to assign a driver to a delivery order in Aura Invoicing This access permission is no longer in use Used to refund a credit card transaction in Aura Invoicing Used to apply a staff meal discount for any employee Used to apply a discount to an order Used to apply a staff meal discount for yourself only Used to browse historical invoices Used to access Cashup screen Cashiers will need this if they are to cashup their own tillshifts This access permission is no longer in use This access permission is no longer in use Used to post a waiter or driver into a till shift Cashiers will need this if they are to cashup their own tillshifts This access permission is no longer in use
241. r Charges A 18 00 Net Sales R 6 670 50 2 Less Coupons F1 R 0 00 Discard Credit Cards F2 R 0 00 Stock Cheques Fal FA 0 00 Cash On Hand F4 A 0 00 A Debtors F5 R 0 00 Fetty Cash FE R 0 00 Teni GRV s Paid F 0 00 Employee Wages Fr R 0 00 a Add Addit Banking F8 R 0 00 Cashup Driver Floats F9 F 0 00 Float Issues F11 FA O00 Till Float F101 R 500 00 Gratuities F 0 00 R 7 17050 Monitoring Fost Lock Open Till F 12 Se Retail License License Renewal Date 06 June 2010 The upper section of the Till tab will display a list of all tills that are and have been active during the course of your trading day while the lower section will display a summary of the selected till QO For stores that have a shift change in the middle of the trading day itis recommended to do a till cashup and get the new cashier to activate their own till shift Atill shift that has been ended has both a Date date and time started and a Close Date date and time shift was ended If there is no close date the shift is most likely still active 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 60 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Cashup Procedure In the Till Shift Summary section you will see function shortcut keys to each section of the cashup Till Totals OverRings A 0 00 Gross Sales Ex O R A 261 40 Less Discounts A 608 90 ADD Deliver Charges R18 00 Net Sales R 6 670 50 Less Coupons F1 A 0 00 Credit
242. r message at Startup While using the Display Pending Items feature displaying multiple new orders no longer cause Kitchen Items to stop responding Improved e Kitchen ltems network connection status is now shown on the main screen e The application no longer needs to be restarted after temporarily losing connection to the server computer New The Time Sync plugin included with Aura will now run on startup of Kitchen Items which will synchronise the computer s date and time with the server computer items Cooked Order Preparation Fixed Trying to access either Items Cooked settings or the Aura settings no longer gives an access violation Preparation Monitor Improved The values displayed in the list of orders is now set as read only Contact Manager Fixed Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Software Changes 11 Aura Contact Manager no longer crashes on launch Time Sync Plugin Fixed The Time Sync plugin works correctly again with the new version of Aura 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 12 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Previous Change Logs All change logs since the previous major release version will be kept in subsequent updates for easy reference a Aura 6 3 8 Changes BackOffice Fixed The selection for the Force password change every X days setting now only accepts a positive value An error caused by scrolling past the last item while viewing the
243. r section of the Edit Discount Code window tick the Time Specific box to enable this option Then click on the a button to as seen below Time Specta J Discount Time Table E S X This will present the following window Whole Week Whole Day L_ Monday O fizonooam O fi2ooo0am O fizan 12 00 00 AM 12 00 00 AM 12 00 00 AM C Tuesday E O fiza O hzmnma S fi2o0 00 aM 12 00 00 AM 12 00 00 AM 12 00 00 4M Wednesday M Mi annann an ed Mi sanna ak ce Mi annann ak es Using this window you may select when the discountis available below is a description of how each field works Whole Week Tick box in top left corner Selecting this option will automatically activate the discount for all seven days of the week after which you can select the time period for each day Whole Day Column of tick boxes immediately to the right of the days of the week Ticking this option for any specific day will make the discount available from the first minute of that date up to midnight on the selected day Specific Time Section Three columns of tick boxes with time blocks Next to the Whole Day option you will see three sets of tick boxes and times for each day If you do not want the discount to be available 24 hours a day you may select anywhere up to three active time periods during your trading day Once one of the three time periods has been activated you may select an opening and closing time for the sele
244. rd or get stuck on the cheese grater For more information see the section on Wastage Percentagel 5f Press Enter or Return on your keyboard or selecting a different field with the mouse will enter this figure into the relative field Once the entire stock take has been entered ensure that the figures are correct and click the post button on the top toolbar to save the stock take Clicking the New Edit button before a stock take has been posted will give you an option to cancel the stock take doing so will display a message similar to the following Confirm The Stock Take for 28 October 2010 has not been saved lt Do You Want To Save It Clicking Yes on this message will post the current stock take and immediately start a new stock take while clicking No on this message will close the current stock take without posting the stock counts Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 41 5 1 2 Purchase Stock The Purchase Stock screen is used to enter any goods received vouchers for stock coming into the store From these captured GRVs Aura stores information vital to that item including the stock unit cost calculated as per the unit of measure for each item which in turn ties directly to the recipes for your menu items This automatic update allows Aura BackOffice to display the profit margin on any menu item individually allowing you to isolate the lower performing items on your menu and o
245. rd the quantities used in the recipe Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 49 Manufacturing Using The Master Recipe As we will see further down the recipe for Cheese Mix uses 0 5kg of Cheddar and 0 5kg of Mozzarella giving us a yield of 1kg If we use enough cheese to manufacture 5kgs of Cheese Mix we will use 2 5kgs of each cheddar and mozzarella Manufacture Stock Manutactured ltem Details Location Default Stack Cheese Mix E CMO02 Batch Oty 5 000 Use Master Recipe iw Batch rield f Measure KG When you click on OK you should see the following details Manufactured Items W H p EJ ka E fa Etr gt Manufactured items Cir A R ZELER tems rc Recipe For Manufactured ltem a i a E 0 5 KG CHEDDAR CHEESE R 53 08 R 26 54 0 5 KG MOAA amp RELLA R 51 01 R 25 50 The following may help to help understand the header line better In the Default location we will manufacture Cheese Mix in a Measure of KG using the Master Recipe which Yields 1kg 5 times over 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 50 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Manufacturing Using a Custom Recipe If you find that the master recipe is different from what was actually used you will need to manufacture the Cheese Mix without selecting Use Master Recipe which will show the following screen Manufac
246. rder Click on the Purchases section to bring up a list of items that can be For more information see the section on the Stock Item Selector 37 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 44 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Once you have selected the desired stock item and clicked on OK you should see the following Stock Purchase GAY 10914 GAY Date 28 Oct 2010 Stock Item 30 ml TUB amp LID m r uantity Unit 0 000 EACH Pack 0 Price VAT Escl A 0 00 VAT Inel A 0 00 Location Default OK Cancel GRV This will automatically update with the GRV number of the purchase order that the stock item is being added to GRV Date This will show the date that the selected GRV will be saved on Stock Item Displays the stock item that you have marked for purchase If you selected the incorrect item and need to change it click the A button to go back to the Stock Item Selector Quantity If you are purchasing items that come pre packed in crates or boxes itis likely that the stock item itself has a Pack Size set up If you are unsure of the pack size or if the Pack option is unavailable simply enter the Unit quantity as normal Q If you are purchasing cans for example each can will come in a six pack Therefore the pack size for cans may possibly be set to 6 If you are purchasing 2 trays of cans with 4 six packs each then the number of six packs would come to 8 You will see with items that h
247. re information see the section on Items Per Report Group 142 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 129 Sales Location With larger stores and restaurants itis quite likely that multiple locations are available for the stock to be stored In these situations certain menu items can be set to pull their stock from one specific location as opposed to the default location Items can also now be assigned to Sales Locations by a wizard For more information see the section on Items Per Sales Locationh4 Item Commission Setting a menu item commission value will cause this menu item to be shown on the Commission Per Menu Item Report Remember that by setting this option it will not affect the employee wages this will only show on the commission report This feature is for incentive calculations only and is not linked to the wages in any way For more information see the section on the Commission Per Menu Item Report Percentage Selecting this tick box will change the commission figure from a rand value to a percentage of the menu item price VAT Exempt Selecting this option will mark the selected item as exempt from value added tax Printers This block lists the available production printers set up in the Aura software Aura Invoicing will print the selected menu item to any kitchen printers that are ticked here You can use this list to assign or clear single items menu categories or the entire menu to pr
248. re is an alternative to updating WJ the stock item cost The easiest way to find the last known purchase for any stock item is from the Item Details section of the Count Stock Screen 3 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 152 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Inactive Items marked as inactive are items that are no longer in use by the Aura system but which cannot be deleted W Due to the Aura system s advanced stock control features a stock item cannot be removed completely from the system if itis still linked to stock purchases stock takes menu item recipes and sales or manufactured item recipes Allowing this will cause a miscalculation in the affected areas and therefore cause unexplainable variances and differences in the stock control features Ifa stock item is used in at least one recipe you will see the following warning when marking this item as Inactive The stock code DCOO 2 is used as an item in 11 menu item recipe s and cannot be removed Would you like to see these menu items F5526B97 CC 52 4E27 9B4C DGAF76C 90999 At this point you may click on Yes to see a list of the menu stock items that use this in their recipe The length of the menu items list will depend on how manyitems use this stock item in their recipe but from the top of the window you will see something similar to the following Menu Item Recipes That Use Stock No DOOO 11 Search Characters ITEMDESC d Feta Cheese Extra
249. reated on the system to link the expense to For more information see the section on Expenses Items and Categories 16 we BackOffice Pay Expenses Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Capture Expenses Browse Payments Date 2012 04 16 lt gt Count Stock paid Expenses A pis eee Sete e e e pe a ae ae Pitches Expense Entry Code SubCategory ltem Description Supplier Quantity Stack 3 Return Stock a Date Select the date for which you would like to view or add expense payments lt gt E Use these buttons to browse through the previous and following dates one day ata time Paid Expenses Toolbar Use these buttons to navigate the expense payments entered on the selected date List of Expense Payments This will display a list of all expense payments entered for the selected date 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 66 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Capturing Expense Payments To capture an operating expense click on the id button from the toolbar This will bring up the Expense Item Selector as seen below Expense Item Selector Expense Category ALL Search ss s sSsSSCS Expense Subcategory A Clear Table Protector Night Staff Transport i If you have no items in the list available to select you will first need to set up your expense item categories and WV items For more information see the section
250. rent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 182 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 7 3 2 Performance The Staff gt Performance window displays the sales performance information of your waiters and cashiers This will display the employees that are responsible for processing customers orders if a waiter has permission to start a new table order they will show here as well As the window Is opened you will see a screen similar to the following Cashier Performance Daily Cashier Performance Comparison Cashier Performance History Specity date 20097 07 06 Cashier Performance Ranking DATE Employee Sales Value Number Ut Sales Average Sales Value if 200507706 reve E 3 010 60 4t A 92 94 My 2005 07 06 503 R447140 45 A 39 36 200970706 a04 A rr 20 2 A 135 60 Average Transaction Size by Cashier On the Daily Cashier Performance Comparison tab as seen above all employees matching the requirements will display in the list at the top as well as in the bar graph below that On the bar graph the numbers up the left hand side are rand values whereas the numbers along the bottom of the graph are employee numbers to identify the employee Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Monitoring 183 Cashier Performance Daily Cashier Performance Comparison Cashier Performance History From date 2009 06 29 Until date 2009 07 06 Cashier Performance Ranking Date Employee Valu
251. rger each AULD a MEOO Ham kg R 0 00 CLOTS Hand diyer rental each A 0 00 CLO14 Hand soap ltr A 0 00 CLOTS Hand tol tr R 0 00 CLOTE Handy andy ltr A 0 00 LIQ 004 Hanza each A 0 00 DED22 Heaven each A 0 00 As you type the list will update and select the first item matching what you type Once the desired stock item has been located you can add itto the recipe by pressing Enter on your keyboard double clicking on the stock item or pressing the E button Doing so will present the following window Add ingredient to recipe Enter the quantity for the following item Desciption Ham Measure kg Curent Oty O Take note of the Measure and enter the quantity required in the recipe for this item Press Enter on your keyboard or click on OK when done You should now have the stock item in the recipe for the selected menu item as seen below Recipe for Pre Manufactured Stock tems Recipe Yield Recipe Cost A 0 00 ME0QZ 0 75 kg Ham F 0 00 MEDO4 0 5 kg Salami R 0 00 GAZ 0 01 kg Salt Fine R 0 00 Removing Items from a Recipe If you need to remove an item from the recipe select the item from gt the recipe on the left and press the E button This will show the following prompt 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 156 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Clearing the Entire Recipe gt gt To clear the recipe block and start again use the Thi ill bri he followi puton lS W
252. room do not tick this box Ww This setting will have a more noticeable effect on stock items that have a set Wastage Percentage As described under Stock Items the wastage percentage is the amount of stock that is wasted in preparing the stock for use A polystyrene cup would not have wastage where as grated cheese would Comment This field is available as a reason for discarding the stock Measure Displays the unit of measure for the selected stock item Once the required fields have been entered click the OK button to save This should display a line similar to the following gt Transfer Stock Date Transferred 05 November 010 gt From location Default To location OoOo HH p a EHE Date Oty Measure Stock Item From To Prepped Prep Unit Cost Comment i 05 Nov 10 4 CAN BINTE AB CANS Default wWastage Falze A 307 Cane punctured At this point Aura BackOffice will automatically update your stock list through the system allowing you to see the information entered on your reports Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 53 5 1 6 Transfer Stock The Transfer Stock screen allows stock to be moved from one location to another This could be from one internal location to another internal location or from an internal location to an external location and vice versa The uses of this feature can be as simple as moving stock from a larger bulk store room to the smaller in
253. ror relating to the old reporting engine files while running the new engine has been resolved Due to the space available the reports will now only display store name instead of store name and trading name The Order Manager reports have been correctly filtered out of the Report Scheduler list An issue with the Report Scheduler running multiple instances during a schedule has been resolved Once minimised the Report Scheduler would not restore the window and needed to be closed using task manager Resolved an issue with certain icons in the tree and list views not refreshing correctly Resolved an issue with table orders on the Sales by Hour by Date report Resolved a rounding issue in the calculations for the Unit sales by Menu Category amp Size reports The food cost percentage calculations were not correctly excluding delivery charges Delivery wages were being calculated incorrectly on the Employee Wages report The Overring Summary report was not accepting the dates correctly from the report parameters screen and returning no data The Purchases by Supplier report calculations have been updated to more closely match the GRV Report data After a recent update the Late Delivery Summary report was referencing the wrong database table and returning no data Resolved an issue relating to VAT exclusive values on the Sales by Category report The Gross Profit report now correctly excludes inactive items with no stock
254. rovements have been introduced to the Report Viewer code to improve it s speed and reliability The Report Scheduler now has a 10 minute interval to check for lapsed schedules previously this would only occur on Starting the service An option to enable or disable a schedule in the Report Scheduler has been added Reports emailed from the report scheduler now have single digit date and time values padded with 0 to make it easier to read The Royalty Reports now include the store s VAT registration number as setin the system settings Sales and Net Sales reports have been updated to group data by the year as well this change will only affect reports run for periods covering more than one year The Employee Wages report now shows the total wages for each employee over the selected report period as well With the addition of a few new reports the general reports structure has been revised and a new report type called Analysis has been added New Various new reports have been added please see the Reports section of the manual for details Invoicing Fixed The VAT calculation was incorrect when applying an invoice discount this includes the Late Delivery flag to an order already containing line item discounts An inconsistency in printing the VAT registration number on original and duplicate invoice prints has been resolved Deleting a lineitem from an open table order was showing an error With the
255. rrent menu item E Removes the selected stock item on the left from the menu item recipe gt gt gt Removes ALL items from the menu item recipe Be 4 By Copies the current recipe to the computer clipboard for later use l Pastes the recipe currently in the clipboard into the current menu item Scale all stock item quantities in the recipe by a percentage Stock items available for recipes The right half of this tab lists all your stock items that can be used in a recipe This list includes items that are purchased and items that are manufactured in store Code Displays the unique stock item code Measure Displays the unit of measure for the stock item Description Displays the named description of the item Cost Displays the cost to store of the specified stock item Category Displays the category that the specified stock item belongs to O With both sections of the recipe tab the Cost columns are worked out from the purchases entered for the specific stock If a stock item shows a RO 00 cost it may be that the item has not yet been purchased or was purchased incorrectly In this case please check your stock purchases For more information see the section on Purchasing Stock 41 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 123 Adding Items to a Recipe To create a recipe for a menu item start with the Stock items available for recipes section on the right hand side Search for the
256. rs Second Toolbar Select Changes the mouse pointer function to allow you to select an object on the screen S Wall Click this button and then click anywhere on the layout panel to place a wall B Door Click this button and then click anywhere on the layout panel to place a door i Window Click this button and then click anywhere on the layout panel to place a window tal Portal Click this button and then click anywhere on the layout panel to place a portal to another floor level Text Click this button and then click anywhere on the layout panel to place a custom text block El and T Table Click this button and then click anywhere on the layout panel to place a round or a square table m g EFi Select Table Use this button to change a table s assigned number bale Delete Click this button to delete the currently selected item 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 74 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Adding Objects Begin by creating the outline of your store by adding the Walls to your floor plan Once you have the outline you may begin to add your Tables to the layout cy If there are no tables available or no more unused tables you will be presented with the following message There are no more tables Would you like to create additional tables This will present the Table Selection window for you to add more tables For more information on this window see the sec
257. rs tats dil v0 0 0 0 Labour anagerPlugin dll 1 1 2 0 l LicenceCheck dli 1 7 0 0 Only use on these tills TimeSync dil 1 7 0 0 ji 1 SERVER 2 MAINT 3 MAING 4 MAINS Once you are satisfied with the configuration of all plugins in the list you may close the plugin manager W When the manager is closed a note is displayed stating that Aura must be closed and reopened before any changes will take effect Any till ID that has had a new plugin activated or a current plugin deactivated must have Aura Invoicing or BackOffice restarted before the changes will make a difference 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 ta nmlfrifian LOR Rian ml Pry Griz f ATT aY a N les lt a V FF s gt Da CLAVITICGG 28 0 9 IV a i la i 5 10 Add ins The Add Ins menu contains features that were added to Aura BackOffice after it s release To find out more information about these features see the relative section below e Design Floors 72 e Database Optimiser 76 e Database Purgel 77 Street Sweeper 80 e Report Scheduler 82 There are more add ins available for the Aura system that are not included in this list For more information on these extra add ins you may download their individual user manuals from the Aura Product Manuals page on the Cosoft website www cosoft co za 5 10 1 Design Floors The Design Floors feature is used to set up an interactive floor plan layout
258. run this program Backup now wD As the Database Optimiser updates information in your database for safety reasons the application will not continue unless a backup is performed first Optimise Process Please be patient while your database is being backed up Once the backup completes Database Optimiser will continue with i s process At the end of which you should see the following window a Database Optimiser ver 1 0 1 0 Reindesing Tmpt0 16511 39RecentPricing Reindexing T mp1071 207031 ManStockPricing Reindesing tmpR eps tuse losing Reindesing T mp1 071 752107RecentFricing Reindexing T mp10711992495 tockPricing Reindesing IN OILES Completed at 2011 02 26 11 34 09 Completed at 2011 02 28 11 34 09 W If you encounter any error messages atall please leave the error message on screen and contact our Aura Help Desk immediately For more information see our Contact Details 233 After working with the Street Sweeper it is highly recommended that you Update Customer Statistics 97 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 77 5 10 3 Database Purge The Database Purge application is part of the database maintenance software This application is used to remove old and outdated trading information from your database keeping your database at an optimal size for best performance and system Stability W This section of the manual is simply to cover the main points to be
259. s Customers etc These will be covered in more detail for each section specifically After selecting the desired field to search for start typing the value you wish to search for in the Field Value block How the search window locates the record is determined by the following criteria Case Sensitive Selecting this option will drastically narrow the search to values matching the case For example if the value you are looking for is PIZZA and type in pizza or Pizza in the field value it will not find the record Exact Match The entire field not just part of it must be equal to the Field Value Partial Match at Beginning The beginning part of the field must be equal to the Field Value Partial Match Anywhere The field must just contain somewhere within it the Field Value 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 28 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Dataset Filter Ti Itis essential that you have an understanding of the menu items or stock items structure before you can effectively w use this tool If you do not maintain your own menu in store and rather download it from a central head office store you may possibly not be able to make full use of this feature the Locate Specific Records feature described above will be better suited to your needs The dataset filter is an invaluable tool when updating a set of records whether these are menu items or stock items this tool will assistin filtering the availabl
260. s days shop cashup is un posted When selected the previous day s shop cashup must be posted before trading can commence for a new day 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 206 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 3 3 5 Imaging General invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email General Example Display monitor Primary Display Item Details F Text colour O clWhite Background Colour L clBlack Rotate image delay s fa Display price while scrolling B nvoice displa Invoice Item Message linvaice items Invaice Total Message linvaice details on ji o D O f emo S Iness Browse image delay s 5 Item Price Change Image Ww These settings will only have an effect if you have each computer set up with the necessary hardware and software for the Aura Imaging application to function correctly This hardware setup requires two computer monitors on each till computer one facing the cashier and a secondary monitor facing the customer If you do not have this you will not need to adjust these settings General Display Monitor Primary Secondary Tertiary Select the monitor that is used for the customer imaging display Display Item Details Tick this option to display extra details about the menu item being displayed on the customer imaging display Text Colour and Background Colour Select the text colour and background colour
261. s out of the right hand panel keep in mind that you may select multiple reports with the ctrl and shift modifiers a lt Remove All If you wish to remove all reports from the current list this button will remove all reports from the right hand panel Once you are satisfied with the reports included in this batch move onto the Schedule tab to specify when this batch of reports should run W The individual reports settings must still be specified for each report added itis imperative that you setthese options after creating the batch Another reminder will be seen atthe end ofthis section regarding this 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 88 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Specifying the Report Schedule Reports Schedule printer settings Occurs once on the 2011 09 05 at 12 00 00 AM ss Select this button to set up the report schedule As the report batch schedule dialog opens you will be presented with the following window ices Rie by pee te ork we eronilor PRAT Bee Pou e One Time Occurence Date 2011 06 10 The default schedule type for a new batch schedule is One Time using this option will run the previously selected report batch once only at the specified date and time If this is the desired option specify the date and time and click the Accept button to save the schedule time If you are setting up a daily weekly or monthly report batch the Schedule Type must be chan
262. s that have custom barcodes created either in store or by the store s head office if applicable Scanning New Barcodes If you have any items with barcodes on the label you may scan them in here In order to scan a new barcode click on the E button This will display the following prompt Bar Code Scanner Please scan the bar code Cancel At this prompt activate your barcode scanner and scan the product 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 134 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 4 Optional items When using a menu that is designed to cater for multiple stores in different areas you may find that certain items are unique to certain stores For the most part the optional menu item option is used for alcoholic beverages as only a handful of stores do sell these products this does not restrict the optional items to this one item type however For a listing of which items should be optional in your menu please contact your brand head office or menu layout designer for more information When the Optional Menu Item screen is access you will see a window similar to the following screenshot wt Optional Menu Items Added Menu Items Number of menu items to add 38 APPLE TIZER 2L CORE BUDDY CORE LIGHT BUDDY FANTA ORANGE FRUIT COCKTAIL BUDDY FANTA GRAPE GRAPE TIZER RED VALPRE MINERAL WATER STILL MANGO ORANGE JUICE PASSION FRUIT JUICE POWERADE JAGGED ICE POWERADE MOUNTAIN BLAST PO
263. s to select the printer that those items need to print to This may be one printer or more than one printer as seen below MEitchen Printers Kitchen Printers Assign all selected items to the selected printer Assign all selected tems to the selected printers O Production Printer E wt Producton Printer 2 Sroduction Printer 2 One printer selected Two printers selected Once the printers have been selected click the button above to assign the items This will assign the selected item or items to the selected printer or printers after which the assigned items will be removed from the list on the left Repeat this process until all required menu items have been assigned to the desired printers Once all items are assigned the list on the left should be cleared out 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 142 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 7 Items Per Report Group Report Groups allow more versatility in the summary reports when viewing reports you will notice certain reports have a second option in the menu labelled as lt report name gt By Report Group Aimed mainly at combo stores one beneficial feature of separate report groups is the ability to have different Royalty Percentages for each report group For more information see the section on setting Royalty and Advertising Percentages 200 be done by the option found in Lists gt Menu gt Items under the tab labelled Other For more informati
264. se differences are outlined below e The selected stock items are not manufactured manually through the Manufacture Stock screen e The amount of stock automatically manufactured will only cover that required by the items using this item that are sold It does not account for manufacturing extra stock e Automatically manufactured stock will not show up on the Stock Manufacture Exceptions report e Automatically manufactured stock will show on the Stock Variance report under the Net Stock Movement column For more information on ensuring the reports display the correct information see the section on Reports Settings in the Application Settings 204 Sub Menu Asub menu item is treated in a similar manner to the Auto Manufacture items these sub menu stock items require a recipe to function correctly When a Sub Menu stock item is used Aura checks the attached recipe and deducts the set amount of stock where applicable These items are designed to simplify the design of a menu by eliminating the need to duplicate 3 or 4 standard items over 10 different menu item recipes as seen in the following example 7 In this example we will work with a standard meal in a restaurant thathas a garnish of tomato lettuce a few onion rings and some seasoning If there are 10 different meals that use the same garnish on the side these aforementioned stock items can be grouped together in the recipe for a sub menu item called Garnish By doing th
265. see the section on Disable Petty Cash under the L System Settings 205 Employee Wages F7 Lists the wages of all employees posted into the selected till shift these amounts can be adjusted by a manager if needed Addit Banking F8 Use this option to enter any additional banking if needed this may possibly be an amount that was outstanding from a previous day that was paid in today Driver Floats F9 If your drivers get issued floats from the till shift these amounts will need to be entered in here for the till shift and the driver s wages to balance correctly Float Issues F11 If any other employees are issued with a float amount such as for promotional work or a kiosk sponsored and supported from the store those loan float amounts must be entered here Till Hoat F10 This is the float amount for the selected till shift j If the till shifts have a set float amount everyday you can seta Default Till Float amount in the settings For more W information see the section on Invoicing Device Settings h19 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 61 Posting and Locking Till Shifts Once the till shift is balanced you may now post the shift by pressing the Post button in the lower left corner of the screen as seen here R 0 00 ad i N A E 1r e EE TA UN Poety Lack Open Till F12 Repeat this process until all tills are balanced and posted They will show green when posted pote
266. sert a blank line for you to enter a name for the new category as seen below Stock Categories Ea ADYVFRATISING al After entering the name click the button to activate the category If you need to remove a category click on the desired category and click the button A category can only be removed if there are no stock items assigned to it whether active or inactive If you try to remove a category that still contains stock items you will be presented with an error message Stating This code is in use and cannot be removed 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 148 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 7 2 Items The Stock Items screen is used to maintain your currently active and inactive stock items If you maintain your own stock items for example adding or removing your own items you will use this screen If your store downloads a menu from a head office store the stock items will be downloaded alongside that menu in this case you will not be able to change many of the settings you see here F BackOffice Stock Maintenance 2 5 m x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Stock Items Navigatio 1E r cn ee a e a cd rI Refresh Costs Category Filter aLL Show Active Sount Stock Field view Spreadsheet View A ltem Description Stock Code DAD GEN Description ADVERTISING GEN wastage 0 Purchase Stock Category ADVERTISING Uni
267. sheet sorting option now correctly sorts items by description when selected The Sales by Hour by Report Group report includes the report group names in graph titles Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Software Changes 15 The Hours Worked field on the Employee Cashup Summary report now uses an hour format with a minimum of 2 digits for the hour The Employee Cashup Summary by Shift report no longer displays a currency symbol The Stock Movement by Location report now also includes the selected date range in the report header New The Online Orders report now displays the online payment details for appropriate orders Aslip version of the GRV report has been added allowing a simplified version of the report to be printed out on a slip printer Invoicing New When reprinting an online order the Online Payment Details slip will be reprinted along side the order Aura 6 3 3 Changes BackOffice Improved The extension code request has been removed from Aura this should no longer prompt for the code when running reports or processing the shop cashup BackOffice now saves it s application executable path to the registry for easy access by the Aura Updater Four new access codes have been added to BackOffice for upcoming Analysis reports Report Viewer and Scheduler Fixed Aproblem with the Report Scheduler window not restoring properly after being minimized has been resolved Astartup er
268. sired code Pee ee A a oe oe and description fields as seen here R ption Default These fields must be unique attempting to add two separate departments with either the code or description fields T the same will not work After you have entered the desired code and description xj click on the a button to save the changes As seen here _ Code Description DEF Default DEP1 Department 1 I DEP3 Department 2 Once you are satisfied with the list of departments simply click on the Close button to leave this screen The next step is to specify which departments each menu item is included in For more information see the section on the Menu Items Other Tabl1321 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 118 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 2 Categories The Menu Categories window is used to maintain a list of categories to group your menu items together For stores that download the menu these will be preset by your head office and you should not ever need to use this window If you are setting up your own menu amongst other things a well thought grouping system for your menu items will result in e Easier nvoicing menu navigation increasing the efficiency of your cashiers e Clearer sales reports making it easier to find information Menu Categories a 3 X ne a E Description Ste M Touchscreen Buttons PROMOTIONS RAEE r F
269. soon as it ends The clock in and out procedures are done from Invoicing and are described in the Invoicing user manual Commission Percentage Enter a commission percentage for any orders rung up by this employee Only applies to cashiers or waiters with access to ring up table orders Shifts To Date If the employee has worked here previously and is returning to his previous position you may enter his her shifts previously worked Rate per Delivery Enter a fixed rate to add to the driver s wages for each delivery assigned to him her Only applies to drivers Km Rate Enter a fixed rate to add to the driver s wages for each kilometer traveled during their shift Only applies to drivers 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 108 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Confirming Settings and Saving Employee If you wish to go back and change a field or just review the options entered click on the Back button to move back a step Once all the required information has been entered for your new employee click on the Finish button to save the changes This will save the employee and return you to the employee records If the employee has been added successfully you should now see the new employee in the list as seen below Emp tlLastName FistName Category Phone 1 Phone 2 Fist Steet System pet Hisee System Manager MGR System Cashier CAS System Driver DAW System Wi aitror WT A System Trainee Manager TAM I
270. specific date of the month followed by how many months between the report For example this could be on the 3rd of every month or the 1st of every second month The second option allows more variation on the dates the first drop down selection allows you to select the first second third fourth or last of the denominator which can be set as any specific day or every day of the week This is then followed by the number of months between report batches For example this can be set to run on the first Sunday of every month the third Monday of every second month or every the first day of every month Daily Frequency select one of the two options Occurs once at hh mm ss Using this first option will run once on each day at the specified time only after having run for one day the next run will be on the next recurring day Occurs every x hours minutes Starting at hh mm ss and Ending athh mm ss Using this second option allows you to set the batch to run every certain number of minutes or hours for a select period of the day For example you could set the batch to run every hour from 9 00am to 10 00pm while the store is trading while not running Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 91 any earlier than 9 00am or later than 10 00pm Duration Start Date yyyy mm dad End date yyyy mm dd and No end date If the schedule you are setting up is only needed
271. start on a new page for each supplier The Stock Variance report no longer cuts off the time stamp for opening stock which would prevent the opening stock from displaying in some cases The Stock Take Worksheet stock location selection now excludes external stock locations The Sales by Hour by Report Group report now shows the different transaction type values correctly on the last page graph While Persist User is enabled if a user attempts to run a report they do not have access to the appropriate warning message is no longer shown twice The Driver Cashup Detail report now shows all assigned delivery orders correctly for each employee The Control Sheet report no longer filters out stock return entries Numerous reports in the stock summary sales and cashup categories now correctly include all GRVs whether balanced or unbalanced The Employee Cashup Summary no longer cuts off the distance travelled for drivers if over 100km While using certain newer report printers the Overring Summary report would cause an error when run Some spelling and grammar mistakes in the error messages have been fixed Improved When running reports in the background the Report Viewer now frees the memory used when the report form closes The Commission by Menu Item report now excludes menu items with no assigned commission percentage The Menu Items with Recipes report now filters out inactive menu items The Stock Take Work
272. stock location This will be unavailable until a list is copied 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 160 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Editing Contents of Stock Locations Begin by selecting the stock location you wish to edit Click on the down arrow next to Current stock location to see which are available as seen below Stock Locatio Current stack location Default Search Default Dry Storage ltokamcer External Storage Aoom If the desired location is not found in the list you will first need to add it to the stock locations For more information Cold Room see the section on Stock Locations 157 Once the desired location is selected you will be presented with all items included in the location on the left and all items excluded from the location on the right Below is an example of a new stock location with no stock currently included Stock Location Current stock location Eme aaisa Search Stock Included in Cold Roo Stock Esluded from Cold Roo STOCKNO ltemDiesc b H A001 A Pamphlet Distribution ADDS Menus A004 4 Other Advertising AQTU 4 Balloons AQT 4 Balloon Sticks BO01 Torpedo Subs Bode Ciabatta Bread Coo Mozzarella COU Cheddar Slice rans C W Be careful with including inactive items these will be shown with a grey background colour In the above example in order to add stock to the Cold Room location scroll throug
273. store store room If you have different employees that are responsible for each area and stock takes are done separately for each itis advisable to set up two locations for this purpose Another use of this feature is the transfer of stock to another store perhaps if a nearby store has run out of lettuce and your store has some Spare by transferring the stock to this external location the recorded amount of stock can safely be removed from the store room without leaving any unaccounted for stock variances W In order to use this feature you must have multiple locations set up If you do not you will not have any locations available to transfer to For more information see the section on Stock Locations 15 we BackOffice Transfer Stock Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Transter Stock Transfer Stock J Pate T ranetetred jos November 2010 gt From location Defaut r Count Stock To location lt Another Shop ka cA f Po m afe feat P n 3 2 Comment Purchase Stock Date Transferred Select the date the stock was transferred Date aty Measure Stock item From to Prepped Prep Unit Cost g Ea Use these buttons to browse through the previous and following dates one day ata time From Location Select the location that the stock is being transferred from To Location Select the location that the stock is being transferred to Toolbar For more in
274. t Names button will present the following window Street Names per cet pe Adding New Street Names From this screen click on the button to add a new street this will allow you to enter in a street name As seen below O c Te i Street Names After entering the name click on the v button and then click on Close to return to the Street List Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 167 6 10 2 Suburbs Clicking on the Suburbs button will present the following window allowing the functions to enter suburb names and postal codes to link the street names to As seen below Suburb list ae oP de mame o _ SUBURB Adding New Suburbs and Postal Codes Click on the a button and then enter the Suburb Name and Postal Code in the blank fields as shown below The postal code is required in order to allow the labels to print correctly As the labels are incorporated as part of the marketing side or Aura any suburbs without postal codes stored will not be eligible for postal marketing services After entering the name and postal code click on the Close button to return to the Street List 163 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 168 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 11 Over ring Codes The Over ring Categories screen is used to maintain a list of reasons for any order to be over rung These reasons will vary from one type of store to the next For instance
275. t be delivering to this customer or they only wish to do collect orders you may leave the Addr and Street fields blank Doing so will prevent Aura Invoicing from allowing deliveries to be assigned to this customer but will still allow collect orders After setting up the customer click on the Post button on the right hand side to save the changes If the Post button is greyed out then the changes have already been saved Setting Customer as Inactive At times a currently active customer may wish to be removed from your Aura system for some reason If they have orders placed with the store any time in the past their details may not be removed completely as there are previous orders linked to their customer details record but their customer record may be Set to Inactive essentially preventing any new orders from being assigned to the selected customer Firstly locate the customer record in the Customer List Once the customer s name has been found right click on the name and select Toggle Active Status as seen below i MATES 2456 CHERRYANN r 52752 CHERYL TUE NEE ET If the customer is currently active this will set their customer record to inactive However if they are currently under the inactive list of customers doing this will set their record to active again To switch between the list of active or inactive customers select the desired option from the drop down list labelled View at the to of the scr
276. t of measure RAND Bulk Cost R Ooo pe Stock type Non Food Cost Controllable No Prepped Cost P 000 Desired level Manufacture T Inactive Return Stock Iv Exclude from Worksheets F Auto Manufacture at Exernpt Sub Menu Manufacture Pecipe Ordering Deposit Stack Costing Stock Recipe for Pre Manufactured Stock ltem Recipe eld 1 Recipe Cost A 0 00 Discard StockNo Oty Measure Dese oc gt SUML SAUCE CONTAI EACH DP SC7O FOML SAUCE CONTAIEACH R 0 19 pE002 ABI IL EACH R 8 76 Taneler DOOOg ABI 2L EACH RA 11 78 Stock DDABIB ABI BUDDY EACH F 5 34 DDABIC ABI CANS EACH F545 e DMI ACC ACCOUNTING FEES RAND R 0 00 sit DP ACUL ACUTEMPLABELS EACH R 0 00 Cashup DAD GEN ADYERTISING GENEF RAND R 0 00 DOE AGUA MONTE SPARE EACH R 0 00 A DOOOS AGUA MONTE STILL EACH R 1 46 Menu DMLAURA AURA RAND R 0 00 Download Dy Avo Avo KG A 36 73 YAO 4 O PUREE KG A 30 15 J DMD BACON KG A 46 08 PETS DC100 BACTERAX SACHET FA O 00 Activaty DM CS BALLOON CUP amp STIC EACH R 0 00 i DAET BALLOONS 100 R 0 00 Lists BALTIMORE CHOCOL EACH Monitoring Preferences Retail License License Renewal Date 19 October 2013 Menu 374 StorelD 4 i Keyboard shortcuts can now be used to navigate to the previous or next stock item in the current filter Alt left arrow to move to the previous record Alt right arrow to move to the
277. t set up and Edit DiscountCode x save the standard discount After that select the discount and press Ret Ee i the a button on the toolbar This will take you back to the Edit eal ae escriphiors Buy two get one Freel Discount Code window as seen here Discount Amt A 0 00 Fixed fw Override fy Voucher Is Percent Now tick the Auto Apply box notice how the Outermost Pairing option ae Late Delivers Active Ww Status Open 4uto pple D Wutemost Fanna Auto Apply M ENB tema Pairing Priority mo Time Specific is now available as well To edit the auto apply rules click the button as seen in the example below This will bring up the following window Edit AutoApply rules for 123 Buy two get one freen E X Mate Quantity lo C Menulteme f Categories Apple Option Apply To Cheapest Matching Item Get For Fee Get o items for free Apple Discount Io F T Asi discount to o tems Cancel The name bar along the top of this window will display the reference code and name of the discount these settings apply to In this case Edit AutoApply rules for 123 Buy two get one free 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 174 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual The left hand side of this window contains a list of current rule sets for the specific discount to look at To create a new rule set right click in the left hand side and sele
278. t the log file size before purging data doing so will help with reducing the amount of work the server needs to do during the purge After purging data the database optimise will shrink the log file size back down to it s minimum size again However if you are unsure of this option you may continue safely without setting the log file size first 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 78 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Performing a Database Purge Q Before starting the purge process itis highly recommended that you first make sure of how far back the information goes in your database For best results and avoiding the most common errors do not attempt to delete any more than 3 months of data ata time Agood way to check this is to run the Invoice Summary Report for a period covering the time period you suspect contains the earliest information For more information see the section on Invoice Summary Report To begin first select the date from the drop down list calendar as seen below Database Purge ver 1 1 0 0 12 13 14 13 l 25 26 2f 28 ZA Today 2011702728 Once you have selected the desired date click on the __ Delete button to continue Database Purge Process While the purge is running you will see the following screen Database Purge ver 1 1 0 0 Delete data prior to 2006 01 81 i Resize Log Filebbsqllog Ta 512 ME Resize Purge started at 2011 02 26 11 48 16 Shark Dump Log File Compl
279. t was not originally purchased Used to open the Aura Back Office application Used to open the Aura Data Extractor application Version 6 3 9 218 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Access Permission To Run DB Optimiser To Run DB Purge To Run GUI Designer To Run Order Manager To Run Street Sweeper To Set The Royalty Or Advertising Percentage To Split or Group an Invoice To Start A New Till Shift To Transfer Stock To Transfer Table To View Or Change Global Settings To View Or Change Invoice Settings To Void An Invoice Line Access Level Admin Admin Manager Manager Manager Admin Manager Cashier Manager n a Manager n a Waiter Cashier Version 6 3 9 Description Used to open the Aura Database Optimiser application Used to open the Aura Database Purge application Used to access the Table Plan floor designer Used to open the Aura Order Manager application Used to open the Aura Street Sweeper application Used to set the royalty percentages in the system settings Used to split or join table orders in Aura Invoicing Used to start a new till shift in preparation for processing orders Used to access the Transfer Stock screen This access permission is no longer in use Used to access the System Settings for the Aura POS system This access permission is no longer in use Used to mark items on an order as VOIDED and set quantity and price to zero This is designed as a safer alternative to de
280. tails Marketing Account Private Notes Invoice Notes com plaints Inserting A New Customer Phone Enter customer s landline contact number If a default dialing code has been set in your system settings this dialing code will appear here automatically Cell Acell phone contact number Do not leave any spaces in the cell number this field is used for marketing purposes Email Email address for contact Do not leave any spaces in the email address this field is used for marketing purposes F Name First name of customer L Name Lastname of customer Addr Street address of customer This will print on the customer s slip Street Enter a street number in the first field and select the street from the drop down listin the second field This field links the customer to a street inside the system If you do not have the required street in the list please see the section on the Street Listh6 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 114 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Enter in the required fields to save the customer information If this has been entered correctly for delivery orders the customer information screen should display similar to the following Phone 0331234567 FiName John Cell 0821234567 LiName Smith Email jsmith qmail com Addr Street 1 Street Name Suburb Suburb Map A Code 1234 Del Chg R 0 00 Residential Other details Marketing Account If your store will no
281. tal button described above This will prompt you for a level to link to this portal as seen here Second Floor QO This will show all levels other than the level you are adding the portal to Once you are satisfied with the floor plan layout be sure to click on the W Save button before closing this screen If there are any unsaved changes on the floor plan when you try and close the designer a warning message as seen below will show up and you will be given a chance to save the changes You have unsaved changes do you want to save first 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 76 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 10 2 Database Optimiser The Database Optimiser application is part of the database maintenance software This application is used to re index and optimise your database for optimal database speed wD This section of the manual is simply to cover the main points to be careful of and shows a description of the optimise process You should only run this application at the direct request of a qualified Aura Help Desk technician ooo When the optimiser is run you will be presented with the following prompt Information i This application can take a long time to run Itis recommended that all tills be shutdown before this application is run Continue Clicking on Yes will bring up the following prompt Itis recommended that you backup your database before you
282. tem setup in your store if you do not this feature will have no effect NOMAD Purge Delete NOMAD History older than lt Delete older thans Close The first step is to select the amount of information you wish to keep click on the down 4 arrow next to lt Delete older than gt and select the number of days of information to keep from the drop down list Please take note this will select the amount of information to keep and will delete all information from the NOMAD log thatis older than the selected number of days the purge This will now show a progress bar for each log that it clears do not press any keys or try to close this window until you see a message confirming that the purge was completed Delete NOMAD H a ys You may now press OK and then Close the NOMAD Purge window 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 68 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 7 Export Data Exporter The Data Exporter feature is used by our advanced technicians to extract and update information in your system oO This application is used solely by our Aura Help Desk and Call Out technicians You will not need to use this function in normal trade Incorrect use of this program could render your system unstable and possibly cause major data loss The right to reserve information on the operation of this program and it s features is held solely by Coherent Software Solutions instructions of the oper
283. the Chicken Strips Large is twice the size of the standard one it will require twice the quantity of items in the recipe To change this click on the button This will bring up the following prompt Scale Recipe Items Scale The Selected Recipe By D Z Enter the percentage to multiply the recipe by To double it enter 200 and click on OK The example recipe will now update to show the following Recipe for above item Description Cost w PT E30 2 EACH SUML TUB amp LID R 0 00 GUZE 0 05 L BEQ SAUCE 8 6A O50 MCST 0 32 KG CHICKEN STRIPS A 13 76 P DFOIL 2 EACH FOIL CONTAINER R1 78 P DFCL 2 EACH FOIL CONTAINE FOLGE POI 2 EACH SERYVIETTES F R 0 11 W If the recipe being adjusted contains packaging items of any sorts ensure that the packaging items are set back to the correct values after scaling the recipe This function will adjust all items in a recipe by the selected scale percentage regardless of type or unit of measure In cases where a recipe only has 3 items two of which are packaging related it would be simpler to just adjust the quantity manually In cases where there are more items Such as 10 items two of which are packaging related itis easier to make use of the scale recipe feature Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 127 Recipe Eat In vs Recipe Eat Out As a new feature in Aura 6 2 recipes can be further customized to cover differences between a take away order and a s
284. the features that were already available have now been revamped to facilitate more flexible set ups The idea of being able to record stock stored in multiple locations is a great way to keep track of stock spread over a large restaurant however by doing so it can create some confusion with the locations that stock is taken from for sales Sales Location You may notice that Sales Locations and Stock Item Locations are in fact the same list this is due to the fact that the Sales Locations specify the location that the stock is retrieved from when a sale is processed To setup and maintain Sales Locations click the E button next to the drop down list This will take you directly to the Stock Locations screen In order to specify the location the stock it retrieved from for a sale with the desired menu item displayed click the down arrow next to Sale Locations as seen below Report Group Default Sales Location Default Cold Room Default ltem Commission Cin Sterane Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 131 Production Printers This list contains all the production printers currently set up in the Aura system By placing a tick in the box next to one of these printers the the selected menu item will be set to print to that printer when added to a customer s order This process may also be done by means of the Kitchen Printer Wizard for more information on this see the X section on the Kitc
285. the report batch the first of three tabs is used to select the reports you want to include in this batch By default none of the reports are included in the current batch these must be manually specified for each batch Below is the section of the dialog box we will be working with Reports Schedule Printer Settings Kitchen Management Cash Tendered Complete Cashup Report Control Sheet Driver Cashup Detail Driver Delivery Report by Shift Driver Delivery Report Employee Cashup Summary by amp Employee Cashup Employee Summary by Shift Employee Wages Petty Cash Report men Shop Cashup Detail By Date ebb le Q The left side of this dialog contains reports that are excluded from the batch while the right hand side contains reports included in the batch Four controls are used to create and editthe list of included reports as explained below gt gt Add All This will move all reports from the left hand panel to the right hand panel This option is not advisable for a recurring schedule running every single report contained in the Aura system at once could quite possibly cause your computer to become unusable for a long time or even hang the system gt By Add Selected This will move only the selected reports to the right hand panel keep in mind that you may select multiple reports with the ctrl and shift modifiers lt i Remove Selected This will take only the selected report
286. the two areas of the Purchase Stock list for keyboard shortcuts GRV Details Area and Stock Purchases Toolbars For more information see the section on Navigating Records 24 In order to add a goods received voucher you will need the following information e Supplier name e List of items with quantities and costs e Total order amount e VAT amount 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 42 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Selecting a Supplier To capture a new goods received voucher click the T button in the GRV List section This will bring up a prompt for a new GRV as seen below Create A New GRY GRY Information GRY Number GRY Date 26 October 2010 Shift Number 0 Supplier Information Supplier yy Ref Telephone Cost VAT Inc Total RA 0 00 VAT AoD VAT is Calculated on Stock Items Till Paid From Til No Amount Paid A 0 00 GRV Information GRV Number GRV Date and Shift Number These fields will be automatically filled in by Back Office as required Supplier Information Supplier Select your supplier name from the drop down list Add New Supplier For more information see the section on Adding New Suppliers h1 Ref Enter your purchase order reference number itis generally accepted to use the order number on your invoice Telephone This will pick up automatically from the selected supplier s contact number Cost VAT Inc Total The VAT Inclusive Tota
287. tically run For more information see the section on Help gt Check For Updates 227 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 210 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 3 3 12 Email General Invoicing Reparts Cashup Imaging stock Search Backup PaleDisplay Picklists Updates Email Email Address Mail Server Mail Server Login Mail Server Password Mail Sending Port 25 Use SSL Fax To Email Host Email Address This field is for your own email address much like setting up a return email address inside common email clients Mail Server This field must contain the public address for the email server these most commonly start with smtp but even this may vary from one to the next Mail Server Login This field must contain your login user name generally provided to your by the service provider Often this is just your username but certain email servers use the full email address as a login name Mail Server Password This field must contain your login password generally provided to your by the service provider Mail Sending Port This field needs the port number for your email service provider s server although this is generally accepted as port 25 for outgoing mail servers If port 25 does not work you will need to confirm this with your service provider Use SSL If your email host requires the use of a secure port you must enable this option Please confirm this with your service provi
288. tion 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 94 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 5 10 5 2 Customizing Report Schedules Once the schedule has been set up the individual report settings must be set These settings have the same basic layout as each report as itis run normally For this section we will work with a weekly schedule containing four reports as seen in the example below 7 gh Empore Ch i E been fall Activity Report by Activity Code be gil Product Sales by Cashier illi Employee Cashup ba al Late Delivery Summary by Date all Activity Report by Activity Code iat i Time and Attendance Report al Product Sales by Cashier alt Late Delivery Summary by Date wily Time and Attendance Report With the weekly schedule selected on the left a list of reports included in the schedule is displayed in the right hand panel At this point you must select the report in the left hand panel in order to specify the report settings 5 Batch Schedules ag Weekly Monitor fe al Employee Cashup be fai Activity Report by Activity Code La dh Product Sales by Cashier Pravna The sak date DateTime iis d be w Late te Delivery Summary by Date UntilDate The ending date DateTime First d Tin SuppressDetail Hides additional report detail True False False With a report selected you will see a list of configurable parameters for the report in the right hand side From this list you may either right click an
289. tion on Adding Tables h7 After adding either a Round Table or a Square Table you will be prompted to assign a table number to that table as follows w Select a table Ground Floor gt a Table numbers that have already been assigned to another table will not show up in this list in the above example WV table numbers 1 through 11 have already been assigned to tables in the layout After placing either a Wall Door Window Portal Text Block or Table you may resize it using the corners of the selected item as seen here Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 75 Adding and Removing Floor Levels To add a new floor click on the Add button from the Levels section on the left hand side of your layout screen this will bring up a prompt to enter a description for the new floor You may add a second or third floor to the Levels After which you will be able to switch pj Levels between each floor by selecting the name on the left as seen here r To remove a floor select it from the list and click the Remove button Note You may not remove a level until all elements on it have first been removed e Adding a Portal for New Floor Levels Now that you have multiple floors you will need to create a Selecta Foor portal to be able to switch between the floors on the layout To do this click the Por
290. to an external location and vice versa For more information see the section on Stock Locations 5 Keep in mind that a stock take may only be done on an internal location all external locations are automatically excluded from the list of selectable location Controllable stock items can be setin order to speed up the daily stock take functions Selecting a stock take for controllable items only will exclude all items notsetas controllable For more information see the section on Controllable Items 5 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 40 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual After successfully starting a new stock take you should see a screen similar to the following Doing New Stock Take Stock Take Details Item Details as of 28 October 2010 Stocktake Date 28 October 2010 Last Purchase Date Never purchased 2 Stocktake Type Complete Stock Take Weal Purchase Price Ron Total alue of SOH Unknown Location Location 1 Er Last Manuf Date Never manufactured Category Description Ctl 1 Last Manuf Cost R 0 00 C Description Only Ctrl 2 Waste 0 Category Code Ctrl 3 Prepped Unit Cost R 0 00 Category Stock ltem description Measure Value Prepped Unprepped Eid H DRINKS boo APFLETIZER Can ROO O O CRINES D BOQST Bonagua Sparkling Each ORINES DoOOO4 FRUIT JUICES 500ML Each R O 00 FLOUR MOHSO DOUGH BALL 1 2 EACH FLOUR MOBR DOUGH BALL EACH MEAT B C BEQ WINGS KILO R 0 00 PACKAGING P
291. to help differentiate which sales comes from which brand in your store In a standard store layout you may leave this field blank Prompt Cashier asking if Credit Card Slip Printed While NOMAD is enabled Invoicing will attempt to prompt the credit card Slip to print By selecting this option the cashier needs to select whether or not the slip printed In this case selecting No will cause Invoicing to try and print again 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 198 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 8 1 3 All Computers All settings found under All Computers will affect all till computers connected to this network Specific Computer All Computers Printers Store Settings Head Office Settings Program Settings Network Settings For more information see the relative section below e Store Settingsli95 e Head Office Settings 200 e Program Settings 20h e Network Settings 215 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 199 8 1 3 1 Store Settings store Settings Head Office Settings Program Settings Network Settings Company Settings EEE Oe Business Name Your Restaurant Branch Your Town store Square Feet 0 Company Name Your Trading Name LS cha 1234567890 Vat Rate E M Vat Rate Not Zero Telephone 0333432135 Disable Pay on Delivery Invoices Trade Until 05 00 Food Preperation Period 00 15 Delivery Time 00 00 Maximum Delivery Time 00 40 Min Order Amount For Delivery 40
292. to the last record in the current filter Insert Adds a new record ready for new information Delete Deletes the currently selected record a Edit Opens the selected record to be modified x Post Saves any changes done to the currently selected record x Cancel Undoes any changes done to the current record back to the last time it was saved These are simply the standard controls found on the navigation bar certain sections in Back Office will have extra X controls to the right of the Cancel button each of which are explained in the relative section Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Getting Started With BackOffice 27 Locating Specific Records Certain toolbars also contain a search button clicking this option will give you a chance to locate one specific record within the data you are viewing For instance Menu Items or Stock Items Da a Clicking on the Locate button will present the following window Locate Field Value Field Value 7 Search Type Case zensitive f Exact Match f Partial Match at Beginning C Partial Match Anywhere Fields First x Cancel In order to search for a specific record first select the field you wish to search Click on the down arrow under the Fields section and select a field name as seen below Fields A AllowPriced verde Back Ptr JEARCODE These fields will be unique to each section of BackOffice i e Menu Items Stock Item
293. tock s Manufacture Stock Discard Stock Transter Shock j on a Lashup a Lists Monitoring Reports a Preferences Activities Lists Find Invoice Employees Employee Categories Bs Customers e Suppliers R The Menu R Menu Categories 5 Monitoring Reports Freferences Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Activity i Employee si Marketing G Summary a Preferences W The Reports sidebar only provides access to the old reports This section will be disabled when using the new reports 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 26 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual In the Aura system all information is store as individual records much like separate pages in a book as a result these records can be filtered and searched using various tools you will find throughout Aura BackOffice Learning to use these tools efficiently will make a large difference with maintaining your store In many screens in BackOffice you will see a Navigation bar as seen here gt Navigation i i A H t yy X This toolbar allows you to navigate through different records in a list Following is a description of each button s functionality G First Moves to the first record in the current filter bi Prior Moves to the previous record in the current filter Next Moves to the next record in the current filter m Last Moves
294. tock Items 142 Stock Cost Calculation Use Fixed Stock Cost This option will use the last known purchase price of the stock items for stock cost calculations Use FIFO for Stock Costing The cost calculation method takes the cost price fluctuations of stock items into consideration A more detailed explanation of the stock costing methods is provided in the introduction to the Reports section of this manual For more information see the Reports manual Royalty Report Includes Enabling this settings forces the Royalty Report to include specific details on the selected stock item This was a special request by one of our customers Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 205 8 1 3 3 4 Cashup General Invoicing Reports Gashup Imaging stock Search Backup PaleDisplay Picklists Updates Email General Cashup Settings W Modify Old Cashups M Driver Gets Delivery Charge W Blind Cashup Till Settings W Tils Cashed Up Seperately Disable Employee Wages M Disable Petty Cash Till cannot be LOCKED if lv Invoices are outstanding W Any till shifts are open lf Drivers are not cashed up shop W One Shop cashup per day W Cannot open tills if previous days Shop cashup is unposted General Cashup Settings Modify Old Cashups Affects the cashup screen it is best to leave this option selected Driver Gets Delivery Charge If your store does deliver orders to customers and your store
295. tons Menu Sizes Buttons Panel Button Images Rows 3 Cols E M Display Logo Filename No image loaded p Display Stretch Preview Transaction Screen Category Buttons Panel Rows and Cols Select the number of rows and columns for the category buttons Menu Sizes Buttons Panel Rows and Cols Select the number of rows columns for the menu item buttons Button Images Display This will select the method to display the scrolling buttons inside a new order Button Font Size Small Medium Large Allows to select between 3 preset font sizes for the text labels on the category and menu item buttons Other Keep List Open If selected After ringing up a menu item Invoicing will keep that category open for the cashier to select another item in the same category Overlap Buttons If selected In a new invoice the menu category buttons will fill the lower left corner of the screen until a category is selected Then the list will be replaced with the list of menu items Use Large Order Scroller This is a new feature of Aura ticking this option will only affect Aura Invoicing Switch Transaction Buttons This option enables the customized invoice button panel while processing a new order Logo Filename Click the button to the right of this line to select an image to use for the touch screen background Display Select this option to turn on the background image De select this option to tur
296. treet Listh6 allowing this same process to be carried out through Aura Invoicing x deo om Grid Reference a Delivery Charge Travel Time Aad New Delivery Area Reference Click on the g button and enter in the required information x Grid Reference fr Deliver Yes Travel Time 0 00 Delivery Charge fo ce Grid Reference Used as a reference from maps Ifthe area is in Column C Row 6 on the map enter C6 in the reference Deliver Select Yes or No from the drop down list If No is selected then you will not be able to assign delivery orders to customers in this grid reference Travel Time Enter the average time taken to travel from the store to this location Delivery Charge If the area is outside of your store s free delivery area then the amount entered in here will automatically be added to all delivery orders in this area This figure includes VAT Editing A Delivery Area Reference a If you need to edit a current delivery area select the delivery area reference from the list and click the a button After making the necessary changes click on the OK button to save If any delivery areas are updated in any way you will be required to refresh the customer information before the WJ change takes full effect For more information see the section on Updating Customer Statistics 97 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 165 6 10 Streets The Street List co
297. tured Items BS M Keys Chl M gt Manufactured items De eee ee From this screen you can now create the recipe that was used in this manufacture session by clicking the Button in the Recipe For Manufacture Item section on the lower part of the window This will again bring you to the Stock Item Selector window this time showing items that can be added to a recipe for a manufactured item Select the stock item from the list and enter the quantity used in a single recipe yield Process Stock Processed tem Details 3 Stack CHEDDAR CHEESE ji C GCC Oty Used E EG H A z O Keep in mind that the quantity entered for the recipe and the recipe yield for the manufactured item will both be multiplied by the Manufactured Quantity to give you the end result Once all items have been added and their quantities entered you may review and revise the recipe as needed Below is an example ofa recipe yielding 1kg of Cheese Mix using different quantities to the original recipe Recipe For Manufactured Item Total Cost FR 53 08 A 21 23 A 51 01 A 30 61 Paste Master Recipe Using this option you can reset the recipe for the currently selected manufacture item and over ride it with the master recipe for that item After which you can add remove change quantities for any items in the recipe Set As Master Recipe If you wish to over write the currently saved Master Recipe with the recipe you have just set up
298. u Items 2 LITRE 2L COKE 2 LITRE 2L COKE LEMON LITE LITRE 2L COKE LIGHT 2 LITRE 2L COKE ZERO 2 LITRE 2L CREME SODA 2 LITRE 2L FANTA 2 LITRE 2L FANTA GRAFE 2 LITRE 2L FANTA ORANGE 2 LITRE 2L FANTA PINEAPPLE 2 LITRE 2L LEMON TWIST 2 LITRE 2L SCHWEPPES GRANADILLA 2 LITRE 2L SCHWEPPES LEMON 2 LITRE 2L SCHWEPPES LEMON LITE LITRE 2L S004 WATER 2 LITRE 2L SPARBERRY 2 LITRE 2L SPARBERRY 2 LITRE 2L SPRITE LITRE 2L SPRITE ZERO 2 LITRE 2L VANILLA COKE edUML ORANGE FRUIT JUICE 300ML RED SQUARE 300ML SMIRNOFF STORM 340ML BLACK LABEL 340ML CASTLE S40ML DRY RED WINE FANA TRY WHITE a IKIE Kitchen Printers HIC Production Printer Production Printer 2 Filter Select a category to filter the menu item list by Take note that this list will only display items that are NOT currently assigned to any production printers Select Click on the All button to select all items in the current category filter Click on the None button to deselect all items This is only available once an item has been selected Menu Items List Below the filter is a list of all menu items matching the currently selected category filter Kitchen Items Assign all selected menu items to selected printer This button is used to complete the assigning process and is only available once menu item s and kitchen printer s have been selected This will be described further down Production Printer List Below the assig
299. u items have been metina customer s order a When selecting this option keep in mind that due to the methods used to check and apply discounts automatically WV these can only ever be applied as line item discounts For more information on the difference between line item and invoice discounts please see the Aura Invoicing manual Outermost pairing This is an extra option relating only to the auto apply feature and is described further below Priority With auto apply discounts you can tell nvoicing what order to search through the list for a valid match This is described further below with the auto apply discounts Time Specific If a discountis only available for a certain time period of each day or only on certain days of the week this can be restricted here Any time the discount list inside invoicing is opened it will only allow discounts that are set to be available during the current day and time For more information see the sections on Auto Apply Discounts 173 and Time Based Discounts 17 Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 173 6 12 1 Auto Apply Discounts Invoicing can be set to automatically check the line items in an order and see if they match a preset discount reason If that is the case the discount will be applied automatically and a notification message will be displayed That process is described in the Aura Invoicing Manual To setup an auto apply discount in Aura Back Office firs
300. unts Settings 203 Quick Start Checklist 30 R Recipe for Menu Items 122 Recipe for Stock Items 154 Version 6 3 9 236 80 190 Remove Duplicate Streets Reports Printer Device Reports Settings 204 Restore Settings Backup 186 Restricted Employee Categories Return Stock 46 Royalty Advertising Percentages ie Search Settings 207 Set Stock Items in Locations 159 Set Up Streets for Deliveries 165 Settings All Computers Overview Settings Printers Overvew_ 211 Settings Restore 186 Settings Specific Computer Overvew Shop Cashup 63 Slip Printer Reports Settings Software Changes 7 Software Settings 186 Software Updates 227 Staff Activity 180 Staff Attendance Monitoring Staff Performance Monitoring 182 Staff Statistics Monitoring 184 Stock Costing Settings FIFO Fixed Stock Item Categories 147 Stock Item Locations 157 Stock Item Selector 37 Stock Items Menu Overview Stock Items Overview 148 Stock Items Deposits 157 Stock Items Ordering Packs Stock Items Recipe Recipe Stock Overview 37 Stock Settings 207 Stock Suppliers 110 Stock Take 38 Store Settings 199 Street List 165 Street Names 166 Street Sweeper 80 Suburb Names 167 Supplier List 110 Survey Questions Synchronise 65 System Settings 7 Tables 177 Till Drawer Device 219 200 198 197 181 146 156 154 115 186 196 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual Till Post Lock Settings 205 Till Shift Cashup 59 Time Base
301. ur store s owner and request access Throughout the manual you will see three information blocks as seen in the following three examples QO Basic tips tricks and suggestions will be displayed in blocks like this These are simply bits of useful information or suggestions you may decide whether or not you use these W Important notices and warnings will be displayed in blocks like this Read through these tips carefully and ensure that you understand them before moving on O Examples will be shown in blocks like this While working through the more complex features real world examples may be used to help explain the reasoning behind certain setups 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 Software Changes 2 Software Changes 7 Software Changes Aura 6 3 9 Changes General Fixed New warning and error message windows in Aura are now wrapping text correctly Not all Aura applications were showing the data link properties window after a failed database connection On multiple monitor setups popup windows such as the System Settings now open on the main application s screen by default Plugins have been updated to work correctly with Aura when running other languages Asecurity hole with handling unusual characters in password prompts has been fixed Improved Application error dialogs now show more information when an error occurs BackOffice Fixed In certain cases the Picklist Manager would cr
302. urrent day s trading As seen below xi Refresh Incl Discount A 22 F000 Excl Discount A 2 158 01 Counter Collect A 233 60 A 233 60 Delivery A fe2 10 RA fe2 10 Table A 0 00 A 0 00 R 3 295 70 R 3 173 71 Cancel The information displayed here will depend heavily on the main transaction type processed by your store This window displays a summary ofall sales as of the moment it was opened If the window has been open for a few minutes and you wish to see the latest information click the Refresh button Click on either OK or Cancel to close this window 7 3 Staff 7 3 1 Attendance The Staff gt Attendance menu option will display a list of employees that have been active in the Aura system on the current trading day As seen below ES attendance for Wed 01 2009 Careoon F P e a CTC Franchisee ae 2009 07701 10 37 35 4 Manager system 20097 07701 08 35 20 Cashier Spaten 20097 07701 08 56 20 Driver Spaten 20097 07701 12 04 20 F Trainee Manager Spaten 20097 07701 08 36 20 Kitchen Staff Spaten 20097 07701 08 51 20 4 If the employee has clocked in and is still active you will see a date and time under the In column If they have already clocked out and ended their current day s shift you will see a time under the Out column as well as the value True under the Clocked Out column Click on the Close button atthe bottom of the window when you are done with this list 2012 Cohe
303. use this option View Master Recipe If you would like to view whatis in the Master Recipe without affecting the recipe you have currently set up use this option Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 51 5 1 5 Discard Stock The Discard Stock screen provides an interface to account for wasted stock If for some reason certain stock becomes unusable i e burst cans broken bottles moisture in the flour or sugar etc you will need to discard that stock Discarded stock should be captured in this screen with care as any items discarded in the Aura system are simply recorded as wastage Ifa batch of stock is instead returned to the supplier as opposed to simply being thrown away then it should rather be captured under Return Stock For more information see the section on Return Stock 46 we BackOffice Transfer Stock Activites Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Activities Discard Stock to Wastage Transfer Stock a Date Transferred 05 November 2010 ka lt gt From location Default Count Stock To location shag payaso re ae ea Ge on Stack Return Stack Date Transferred Select the date for the stock discard here Puchase Date au Measwe Stock t Nem From To Prepped Prep Unit Cost Comment D lt gt Use these buttons to browse through the previous and following dates one day ata time From Location Select the location the stock
304. various different states In it s default running state the Report Scheduler will display 7 the following status If you are having problems with the scheduler often stopping and starting the service will sort out the problem Ina paused or stopped state you will see one of the following status messages By clicking the green start button next to the message the scheduler will attempt to start it s background service again If this does not work often simply restarting your computer will also resolve the issue Batch Schedules Tree View Seen below the application bar to the left this area will show all schedules and their reports while using the application as seen in the example below Batch Schedules Ef Weekly Reports a gi Driver Delivery Report n alfa Petty Cash Report i alfa Shop Cashup Summary by Date i alla Till Cashup Summary A Monthly Reports gil VAT Report Schedule Parameters View To the right of the schedules tree view below the application bar is the parameters view This section of the window will change depending on which option you currently have selected in the tree view to it s left Two important areas here are the toolbar and the parameter list e Parameter Toolbar The toolbar buttons shown here are dependant on the type of data shown These buttons will be covered in their respective sections further on in this guide e Parameter List Any parameters for the item currently
305. ve selected the stock item you wish to transfer and clicked OK you will be prompted for the quantity to transfer as follows Transfer Stock Stock ltem ABI CANS v Quaritity 0 Prepped J Comment Measure A Stock Item This will display the selected item for transfer lf you wish to select a different item click on the Ps to return to the Stock Item Selector Quantity Enter the quantity of the item to be transferred Take note of the unit of measure further down when entering the quantity Prepped If the stock being transferred has already been prepared for use tick this box If it is from the store room do not tick this box Comment This field is available as a reason for transferring the stock Measure Displays the unit of measure for the selected stock item Once the required information has been added click on OK to add the stock item to the list of stock to transfer This should update the list to show similar to the following Transfer Stock Date Transferred E November 2010 gt From location Default To location lt Another Shop pao as ret a BF Date Qty Measure Stock Item From To __ Prepped Prep Unit Cost Comment i 05 Now 10 24 CAN DOU ABI CANS Default A4nother Shop False A a07 Loaning stock ti Repeat this process for each stock item until all stock that has been transferred is accounted for Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Softwar
306. ve topic below e Recipeli2 e Otherli2a e Colouringh3 e Screen Saver h3 e Barcodeli33 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 122 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 6 3 1 Recipe Recipe Other Coloring Screen Saver Barcode Recipe for above iter Stock items available for recipes ey Search Filter ALL 7 Description Category Code Oty Measure Description Lost ea E PTB30 EACH S0MLTUB amp LID A000 PACKAGING ppo 1 CAN ABI CANS R 3 07 s DOW EACH ABI TL FA 5 99 DRINKS Pol 1 EACH STRAWS WRAP F 0 03 nao EACH ABI 2L F 11322 DRINES oe DRA BUD EACH ABI BUDDY BOT A439 DRINES Dogz CAN ABI CAMS R 3 07 DRINES MI ACC RAND ACCOUNTING F A 0 00 OPERATING E AD GEN RAND ADVERTISING FA 0 00 ADYVERTISIA oa DOO LAN APPLETIZER FA 5 45 DRINKS DAOU EACH AQUA MONTE 5 FA 0 00 DRINKS ae Recipe for above item The left half of this tab contains the recipe for the selected menu item Code Displays the unique stock item code Qty Displays the quantity of the stock item used in the recipe Measure Displays the unit of measure for the stock item Description Displays the named description of the items in the recipe Cost Displays the cost to store of the specified stock item as used in the recipe Toolbar l ee Use this button to search for all menu items that have the selected stock item in their recipe E Adds the selected stock item to the recipe for the cu
307. vide a preview at the bottom that updates whenever a colour option is changed 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 9 Help 225 Help The Help menu contains more information relating to Aura and your server computer directly See a topic below for more information 9 1 Dialup IP Address25 Licensing The licensing section is currently undergoing changes current documentation for this is no longer valid Support Information P2 Check for Updates 2 What s New 23 Help Opens this user manual Aboutk3 Dialup IP Address This option may be used by our Aura Help Desk technicians If your internet connection is a normal Telkom telephone dial up connection this option will display the unique Internet Protocol address that your connection has been assigned for that internet session W If your computer is not connected to the internet or you have an ADSL or DSL connection permanently online then selecting this option will show an error Please check the connection and try again If your dial up connection is connected and active you will see a message displaying your current IP address Keep in mind that with a dial up IP address you may possibly be assigned a different address every time you connect 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 226 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 9 2 Support Information At certain times a helpdesk technician may require some detailed and technical informati
308. was just done Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Activities 69 5 9 Plugins Anew plugin manager has been introduced to Aura replacing the old plugin selector previously available from Invoicing This new plugin manager is also available from both Back Office and Invoicing on any computer in your store Various plugins are currently available for Aura each designed to do a different task in the store s trading day Below is a list of a few of the plugins and how they can benefit your store e AEC Check This plugin is designed to check the state of your AEC2 service Aura Enterprise Client 2 if itis not currently running this plugin will attempt to start the service automatically e TimeSync When this plugin is active each computer loading the plugin will compare it s computer date and time with the server and synchronise it if needed This is most useful if an order is processed in the front of the store on Invoicing then completed by the kitchen staff in Kitchen Items e Labour Manager Plugin If you make use the the Labour Manager scheduling application this plugin will allow you to synchronise employee worked shifts and hourly store turnover to your private Labour Manager online profile For more information on this application please go to www LabourManager com Plugin Manager Interface To access the plugin manager from the menus atthe top go to Activities gt Plugins gt Show Plugins After a password
309. wish to edit Search Typing part of a stock item s description or code in this block will filter the lists found below Stock Included in lt ocation gt On the left hand side is a list of stock items that are currently included in the selected stock location Stock Excluded from lt ocation gt On the right hand side is a list of stock items that are current excluded from the selected stock location Toolbar mR Check that all stock items are in their correct stock locations W Before using this feature effectively itis important to understand how Locations work Let s look at the following example we will work with three locations Default which always exisits Alpha and Beta Ifa menu item is in the Sales Location Alpha while the stock items in it s recipe are in either Default or Beta this feature will move these stock items into the Alpha location E Includes only the selected stock item on the right into the current location Same as double clicking on an item in the Excluded list gt l l ies E Excludes only the selected stock item on the left from the location Same as double clicking on an item in the Included list iE E Include all stock items in the current location gt Exclude all stock items from the current location BS me Copy the current list of included stock items to memory T Paste the previously copied list of included stock items to the currently selected
310. xj prompt P This will remove the backup path Are you sure ka B0A282AB CF98 4E7E B334 5D57FC5FE40D Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Preferences 209 8 1 3 3 9 PoleDisplay General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email Line 1 Next customer please Line 1 If you have any customer pole displays setup in your store then the message typed in here will automatically scroll on the display when notin use 8 1 3 3 10 Picklists General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging Stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email iW Enable Picklists lumns To Use Only applies to keyboard interface Code Price Size Enable Picklists By ticking this option nvoicing will allow the use of picklists If you de select this option all menu items will be forced to ignore picklists completely For more information see the section on Picklists h3 Columns To Use Only applies to keyboard interface Code Price Size When a picklist is selected in keyboard mode you may select here which columns to display If none are selected all are shown 8 1 3 3 11 Updates General Invoicing Reports Cashup Imaging stock Search Backup PoleDisplay Picklists Updates Email Update Check Frequency 7 Check Update Frequency This option is to setthe number of days before the Aura Updater is automa
311. y accepted as an abbrewiation of the description see example below is displayed on reports relating to over rings Active If this is selected then this Over Ring Reason will be available from Invoicing Otherwise it will not be accessible Hoax This over ring category option is for reporting purposes After setting up the Over Ring reason click on the aaa button After adding all the required Over Ring reasons please close Aura Invoicing and open it again to refresh the changes Editing Over ring Reasons ah To edit a current discount code either double click on the over ring reason line or select itand press the a button on the toolbar When editing a current over ring reason you will see the following window alo x Description Reference Pe IY Active i Hoa The hoax option fis disabled because ihe reason hes Been used before OK Cancel If the over ring reason has been applied to an invoice before you will not be able to change the Hoax setting 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 170 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 12 Discount Codes The Discount Codes screen is used to maintain a list of available preset and variable discount reasons Discounts are used for various reasons ranging from the most common discounts for store specials for example buy two get one free and also including less common more specialised reasons for example customer complaints These discount cod
312. you will see the following message User 006 confirmed re scan Remember to press the Finish button to save the changes and close the window 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Version 6 3 9 110 BackOffice 6 3 9 Manual 6 3 Suppliers All Goods Received Vouchers GRVs captured into the Aura system must be associated with a supplier record By creating this vital link Aura can better manage and track the stock flow from supplier to store as well as ensuring the correct functioning of the Return Stock feature Certain stock purchase and control reports also use this information to categorize and group information for easier viewing For more information see the section on Return Stock 461 The suppliers list can be accessed by going to the menu Lists gt Suppliers F BackOffice Suppliers Maintenance i l 5 x Activities Lists Monitoring Reports Preferences Help Suppliers a a E E Email s Company Contact Email Count Stock gt RAS Lara 9600 O83 306 0028 ADT CONSULTANT O82 758 6994 A AFROS GAS Laurin Rowan 011 821 3000 O83 702 8653 19265149 S124 51 245665 050505 REF 4084086 368301 phasi Ashou SA Fresh Stock BALTIMORE 012 666 8999 138 REITSPRUIT STREE SUNDERLAND RIDGE BEWARAE Luisa 011 397 5460 g BLUE HILLS MUSHROO Adi O82 475 9914 MIDRAND 1685 DODAM ADA ARORA ADCT ATN A Version 6 3 9 2012 Coherent Software Solutions Lists 111 Creating New Supplier

BackOffice

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents